1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes false
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
170 by the \SpecialChar LyX
175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
177 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
178 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
179 Documentation mailing list:
181 \begin_inset CommandInset href
183 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 \begin_inset Note Note
206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
207 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
208 \begin_inset Newline newline
213 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
223 LatexCommand tableofcontents
230 \begin_layout Chapter
234 \begin_layout Section
235 What is \SpecialChar LyX
239 \begin_layout Standard
241 is a document preparation system.
242 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
245 business letters and proposals,
247 It is unlike most other
248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
256 That means that when you type a section header,
258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
287 takes care of the typesetting for you;
288 so you deal only with concepts,
292 \begin_layout Standard
293 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
298 If you haven't read it yet,
304 \begin_layout Standard
309 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
312 the format of all of the manuals.
313 If you don't read it,
314 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
315 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
318 \begin_layout Section
323 \begin_layout Standard
324 Like most applications,
326 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
327 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
328 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
333 This is not a bug or an oversight,
335 When you read a book,
336 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
337 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
338 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
343 The first case is large images.
344 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
345 left click on the image and use the option
356 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
358 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
361 \begin_layout Standard
362 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
363 menus and toolbar buttons,
364 have a look at Appendix
369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
371 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
379 \begin_layout Section
383 \begin_layout Standard
384 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
386 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
388 Just select the manual you want to read from the
395 \begin_layout Section
396 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
400 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
407 \begin_layout Standard
408 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
409 can be configured via the menu
411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
415 \begin_inset Index idx
420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
427 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
430 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
431 packages are available.
432 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
433 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
434 was installed on your system,
435 you might have some items that you installed locally,
437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
441 \begin_inset space \space{}
444 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
446 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
448 To force \SpecialChar LyX
449 to re-inspect your system use
451 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
455 \begin_inset Index idx
460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
461 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
467 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
468 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
471 \begin_layout Section
474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
476 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
483 \begin_layout Standard
484 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
485 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
486 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs.
487 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
488 every \SpecialChar LyX
489 document can still be output as plain text,
490 as Docbook or as XHTML.
493 \begin_layout Standard
494 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
496 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
497 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
500 \begin_layout Standard
501 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
502 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
503 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
505 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
513 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
516 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
520 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
526 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
534 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
541 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
545 \begin_layout Chapter
546 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
550 \begin_layout Section
551 Basic File Operations
552 \begin_inset Index idx
557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
566 \begin_layout Standard
571 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
574 \begin_layout Itemize
597 \begin_layout Itemize
614 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
620 \begin_layout Itemize
643 \begin_layout Itemize
653 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
678 \begin_layout Itemize
684 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \begin_layout Itemize
720 arg "buffer-write-as"
726 \begin_layout Itemize
740 \begin_layout Itemize
746 \begin_layout Itemize
760 \begin_layout Itemize
775 \begin_layout Standard
776 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
777 with a few minor differences.
780 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
791 command lists the available templates.
792 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features and possibly propose text fragments for the document,
793 features and text you would otherwise need to set or enter manually.
794 They can be of use for certain classes,
795 especially those for writing letters (see section
800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
802 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
808 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
811 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
817 \begin_layout Standard
818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
851 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
852 to open a file or create a new one,
853 that big blank space on the screen is just that —
862 \begin_layout Standard
883 are useful if multiple people work on the same document at the same time.
887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 If you plan to do this,
889 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
892 \begin_inset Flex Emph
895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
896 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
903 \begin_inset Flex Emph
906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
912 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
930 will reload the document from disk.
931 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last saved version.
940 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
943 \begin_layout Section
944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
946 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
951 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
954 \begin_layout Standard
956 lays much stress on safety.
957 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
958 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
960 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
962 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
963 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
964 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
967 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
968 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
969 does not simply make a backup file,
970 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
971 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
972 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
979 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
984 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
987 \begin_layout Standard
989 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
992 \begin_layout Subsection
996 \begin_layout Standard
999 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1001 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1015 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1020 in preferences (see section
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1027 reference "sec:Paths"
1036 then all backups are stored there.
1037 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1038 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1039 but also the path in their name,
1041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1055 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1060 \begin_layout Standard
1061 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1062 and you need to enable
1063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1070 in order to see them.
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1075 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1077 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1080 \begin_layout Subsection
1084 \begin_layout Standard
1087 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1089 \begin_inset space ~
1093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1095 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1100 As opposed to the backup files,
1101 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1104 \begin_layout Standard
1105 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1124 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1130 with all changes saved.
1131 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1136 program crash or power outage),
1137 and this is when they might become useful.
1140 \begin_layout Subsection
1144 \begin_layout Standard
1146 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1147 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1148 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1149 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1152 \begin_layout Standard
1153 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 myfile.lyx.emergency
1167 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1169 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1172 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1173 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1176 \begin_layout Subsection
1177 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1181 \begin_layout Standard
1182 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1183 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1185 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1188 keeps a copy of the old version,
1191 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1194 where <n> is the old format (e.
1195 \begin_inset space ~
1201 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1204 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1205 that is alongside the original document or,
1207 in the backup directory.
1210 \begin_layout Standard
1211 As with backup files,
1212 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1216 \begin_layout Subsection
1217 When to Use Which File?
1220 \begin_layout Standard
1221 Now why all these files?
1222 Because they have different purposes.
1226 \begin_layout Standard
1228 terminates unexpectedly,
1231 \begin_layout Enumerate
1232 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1234 This file has the latest changes,
1235 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1238 \begin_layout Enumerate
1239 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1246 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1248 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1249 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1251 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1254 \begin_layout Enumerate
1255 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1256 use the backup file.
1257 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1258 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1259 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1263 The fourth type of file,
1264 the backup file from old versions,
1265 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1268 \begin_layout Standard
1269 So much for the safety net.
1270 We hope you will not need it,
1272 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1273 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1276 \begin_layout Section
1277 Basic Editing Features
1278 \begin_inset Index idx
1283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1292 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1299 \begin_layout Standard
1300 Like most modern word processors,
1302 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1303 can move by character,
1306 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1307 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1308 editing features and how to access them.
1309 We will start with cut and paste.
1312 \begin_layout Standard
1313 As you might expect,
1318 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1319 along with various other editing features.
1320 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1324 \begin_layout Itemize
1330 \begin_inset Index idx
1335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1365 \begin_layout Itemize
1371 \begin_inset Index idx
1376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1406 \begin_layout Itemize
1412 \begin_inset Index idx
1417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1443 \begin_layout Itemize
1447 \begin_inset space ~
1453 \begin_layout Itemize
1457 \begin_inset space ~
1463 \begin_layout Itemize
1467 \begin_inset space ~
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1477 \begin_inset Index idx
1482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1491 \begin_inset Index idx
1496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1512 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1522 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 The first three are self-explanatory.
1530 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1531 and other programs using
1553 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1558 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1559 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1560 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1561 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1565 \begin_inset space ~
1570 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1571 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1574 \begin_layout Standard
1578 \begin_inset space ~
1583 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1584 Possible formats include HTML,
1589 \begin_inset space ~
1596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1605 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1611 \begin_inset space \space{}
1614 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1617 \begin_layout Standard
1621 \begin_inset space ~
1624 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1626 \begin_inset space ~
1630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1634 \begin_inset space ~
1643 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1644 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1645 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1649 \begin_inset space ~
1655 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1656 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1661 \begin_inset space ~
1664 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1670 \begin_inset space ~
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1681 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1684 paste from the primary selection.
1685 This is normally the currently selected text.
1688 \begin_layout Standard
1691 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1697 \begin_inset space ~
1705 \begin_inset space ~
1709 \begin_inset space ~
1715 Once you have found a word or expression,
1721 \begin_inset space ~
1736 shortcut) to skip the currently selected word,
1740 \begin_inset space ~
1752 arg "word-find-backward"
1755 shortcut) to search backwards.
1756 Even if you close the widget,
1766 arg "word-find-backward"
1769 will search further.
1772 \begin_layout Standard
1777 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1785 field and searches the next match.
1789 \begin_inset space ~
1794 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1799 the following options are available:
1802 \begin_layout Itemize
1807 \begin_inset space ~
1812 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1813 If the toggle is set,
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1826 will not match the word
1827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 \begin_layout Itemize
1848 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1849 to only find complete words,
1851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1883 \begin_layout Itemize
1889 will limit search and replace,
1891 to the current cursor selection.
1894 \begin_layout Itemize
1900 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
1901 without pressing the
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1912 \begin_layout Itemize
1917 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
1918 If this is not checked,
1919 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1920 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1921 so you need to put it back manually.
1924 \begin_layout Standard
1925 \paragraph_spacing single
1926 The widget also has a
1930 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
1931 hiding replace and options.
1937 button brings you back to the full size.
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1941 \paragraph_spacing single
1944 also offers an advanced
1947 \begin_inset space ~
1951 \begin_inset space ~
1956 feature that is described in section
1957 \begin_inset space ~
1961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1963 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1975 \begin_inset space \space{}
1979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1987 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
1988 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
1992 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1999 \begin_layout Standard
2003 arg "inset-select-all"
2006 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2007 When the cursor is inside an inset
2010 arg "inset-select-all"
2013 selects the content of the inset.
2017 arg "inset-select-all"
2020 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2024 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2027 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2030 \begin_layout Section
2032 \begin_inset Index idx
2037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset Index idx
2049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2058 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2065 \begin_layout Standard
2066 If you make a mistake,
2067 you can easily recover from it.
2069 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2072 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2075 or the toolbar button
2082 If you accidentally undo too much,
2085 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2088 or the toolbar button
2095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2102 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2106 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2109 \begin_layout Standard
2118 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2120 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2121 but by blocks of text.
2124 \begin_layout Section
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2140 \begin_layout Standard
2141 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2144 \begin_layout Enumerate
2149 \begin_layout Itemize
2154 once anywhere in the edit window.
2155 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2159 \begin_layout Enumerate
2164 \begin_layout Itemize
2171 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2174 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2177 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2178 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2179 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2182 \begin_layout Itemize
2183 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2186 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2193 \begin_layout Enumerate
2201 \begin_layout Standard
2202 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2203 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2207 \begin_layout Section
2209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2211 name "sec:Navigating"
2216 \begin_inset Index idx
2221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2230 \begin_layout Standard
2232 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2235 \begin_layout Itemize
2240 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2243 \begin_layout Itemize
2245 which is accessed either by the menu
2247 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2249 \begin_inset space ~
2254 or by the toolbar button
2257 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2263 \begin_layout Itemize
2264 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2266 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2269 and use the same menu to return to them.
2270 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2277 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2282 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2283 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2285 \begin_inset space ~
2290 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2291 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2294 \begin_layout Standard
2299 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2303 \begin_layout Subsection
2305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2307 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2334 \begin_inset Index idx
2339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2348 \begin_layout Standard
2349 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2351 labels and cross-references (see section
2352 \begin_inset space ~
2356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2358 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2365 or citations (see section
2366 \begin_inset space ~
2370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2372 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2378 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2381 \begin_layout Standard
2382 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2383 For example with citations,
2384 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2387 \begin_layout Standard
2392 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2394 if you are displaying the list of
2396 Labels and References
2398 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2399 you can enter the text
2400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2407 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2410 \begin_layout Standard
2411 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2416 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2417 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2422 option keeps it in the current view state.
2423 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2427 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2428 \begin_inset space ~
2432 the subsections of sections
2433 \begin_inset space ~
2436 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2441 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2442 \begin_inset space ~
2447 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2456 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2459 \begin_layout Standard
2466 button refreshes the TOC (useful while editing if you have changed sections in the document).
2467 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2480 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2482 you can move section
2483 \begin_inset space ~
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2490 2.4 or after section
2491 \begin_inset space ~
2496 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2509 (or the corresponding key bindings
2517 ) you can change the level of sections.
2518 You can make section
2519 \begin_inset space ~
2523 \begin_inset space ~
2527 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_layout Standard
2534 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2538 \begin_layout Subsection
2539 Horizontal Scrolling
2540 \begin_inset Index idx
2545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2547 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2557 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2574 \begin_layout Standard
2576 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2577 \begin_inset space ~
2580 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2581 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2585 \begin_layout Standard
2586 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2590 \begin_layout Itemize
2592 is used on a small tablet computer
2595 \begin_layout Itemize
2596 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2608 \begin_inset space ~
2621 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 Math constructs with long command names
2625 \begin_layout Standard
2626 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2627 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
2628 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2629 window so that table
2630 \begin_inset space ~
2634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2636 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2642 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
2643 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2646 \begin_layout Standard
2647 \begin_inset Float table
2654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2655 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2660 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2664 Horizontal scrolling test.
2672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2674 \begin_inset Tabular
2675 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2676 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2677 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2678 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2721 \begin_layout Section
2722 Input/Word Completion
2723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2725 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2730 \begin_inset Index idx
2735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2742 \begin_inset Index idx
2747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2780 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
2781 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
2784 \begin_layout Standard
2785 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2788 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2793 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2800 \begin_inset space ~
2804 \begin_inset space ~
2809 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2813 \begin_inset space ~
2818 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2819 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2822 \begin_inset space ~
2828 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
2829 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2832 \begin_layout Standard
2834 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
2839 key to accept a proposed completion.
2840 If several completions are possible,
2841 a popup is opened showing them.
2842 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2849 \begin_layout Standard
2850 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
2852 the special math option
2856 enables characters to be composed.
2858 if you want to insert the character
2859 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2863 you can input the characters
2864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2875 in a formula to create it.
2876 This is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
2877 A list of supported character combinations can be found in the file
2881 located in \SpecialChar LyX
2882 's installation folder.
2887 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2888 In the example above,
2894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2925 \begin_layout Section
2927 \begin_inset Index idx
2932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2939 \begin_inset Index idx
2944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2946 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset Index idx
2966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2968 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2985 \begin_layout Standard
2986 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3002 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3005 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3009 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3016 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3024 \begin_layout Standard
3029 \begin_inset space ~
3038 \begin_inset space ~
3063 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3067 \begin_layout Labeling
3068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3072 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3073 LatexCommand nomenclature
3075 description "Tabulator key"
3082 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3084 If you do not understand this,
3086 \begin_inset space ~
3090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3092 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3100 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3107 \begin_inset space ~
3111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3113 reference "subsec:Lists"
3122 If you are still confused,
3128 \begin_inset Newline newline
3136 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3137 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3140 \begin_layout Labeling
3141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3145 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3146 LatexCommand nomenclature
3148 description "Escape key"
3156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3165 to cancel operations.
3166 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3169 \begin_layout Labeling
3170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3175 These move the cursor,
3177 to the beginning and end of a line,
3178 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3181 \begin_layout Standard
3182 There are three modifier keys:
3185 \begin_layout Labeling
3186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3204 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3205 LatexCommand nomenclature
3207 description "Control key"
3212 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3216 \begin_layout Itemize
3226 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3229 \begin_layout Itemize
3239 it moves by words instead of characters.
3242 \begin_layout Itemize
3252 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3257 \begin_layout Labeling
3258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3276 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3277 LatexCommand nomenclature
3279 description "Shift key"
3284 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3287 \begin_layout Labeling
3288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3306 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3307 LatexCommand nomenclature
3309 description "Alt or Meta key"
3314 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3315 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3316 If you have both keys,
3317 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3322 \begin_inset Newline newline
3325 This key does many different things,
3326 but it also activates the
3328 menu accelerator keys
3331 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3332 it selects that menu item.
3336 \begin_layout Standard
3339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3345 \begin_inset space ~
3349 \begin_inset space ~
3355 \begin_inset space ~
3363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3382 \begin_inset space ~
3388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3398 \begin_layout Standard
3403 manual lists all other things bound to the
3411 \begin_layout Standard
3412 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3413 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3414 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3416 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3417 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3418 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3435 followed by a capital
3442 \begin_layout Chapter
3445 \begin_inset Index idx
3450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3453 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3470 \begin_layout Section
3472 \begin_inset Index idx
3477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3479 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 \begin_layout Subsection
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3501 Before you do anything else,
3502 before you ever start writing a document,
3503 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3504 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3509 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3510 and format the title of your document differently.
3513 \begin_layout Standard
3518 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3519 By setting the document class,
3520 you automatically select these properties,
3521 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3522 If you don't choose a document class,
3524 picks one for you by default.
3525 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3528 \begin_layout Subsection
3530 \begin_inset Index idx
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3537 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3554 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3561 \begin_layout Standard
3562 You can select a class using the
3564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3565 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3569 \begin_inset Index idx
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3576 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3591 Select the class you want to use,
3592 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
3595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3599 \begin_layout Standard
3600 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3605 \begin_layout Description
3606 Article for basic articles
3609 \begin_layout Description
3610 Report for basic reports
3613 \begin_layout Description
3614 Book for writing a book
3617 \begin_layout Description
3618 Letter for US-style letters
3621 \begin_layout Standard
3622 There are also some non-standard classes,
3623 which \SpecialChar LyX
3624 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3626 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3627 distributions will include many of these.
3628 Here are some of the classes.
3629 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3631 Special Document Classes
3640 \begin_layout Description
3641 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3644 \begin_layout Description
3645 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
3648 \begin_layout Description
3649 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
3652 \begin_layout Description
3653 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
3654 There are three article layouts available.
3655 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
3656 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3657 All result-type statements (propositions,
3659 and so on) are sequenced together,
3662 and the like have their own sequence.
3664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3667 sequential numbering
3668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3671 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
3672 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3673 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3674 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3677 \begin_layout Description
3678 Beamer Layout for presentations
3681 \begin_layout Description
3682 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3683 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3685 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3689 \begin_layout Description
3690 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3693 \begin_layout Description
3695 \begin_inset space ~
3698 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3701 \begin_layout Description
3702 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3705 \begin_layout Description
3706 Foils Used to make transparencies
3709 \begin_layout Description
3710 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3711 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3713 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3717 \begin_layout Description
3718 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3721 \begin_layout Description
3722 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3725 \begin_layout Description
3726 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3729 \begin_layout Description
3730 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
3731 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
3732 automatic print space calculation etc.
3733 (Is used by this document.)
3736 \begin_layout Description
3737 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3740 \begin_layout Description
3741 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3744 \begin_layout Description
3749 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
3750 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
3751 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
3752 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3756 \begin_layout Description
3757 Slides Used to make transparencies
3760 \begin_layout Description
3762 \begin_inset space ~
3765 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3768 \begin_layout Description
3769 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3772 \begin_layout Standard
3773 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
3774 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3776 Special Document Classes
3784 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
3787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3791 \begin_layout Standard
3792 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3794 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3795 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3799 \begin_inset Index idx
3804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3806 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3829 If you open a document that uses such a class,
3830 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
3831 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3834 \begin_layout Standard
3837 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
3844 are highly specialized.
3846 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
3847 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
3848 with a growing number.
3849 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3850 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
3851 There are just too many of them.
3852 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3855 \begin_layout Standard
3856 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3865 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3866 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
3868 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3871 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3878 manual for information on how to install them.
3879 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3887 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
3888 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3890 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3891 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
3892 The \SpecialChar LyX
3893 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3896 users can write their own layout files,
3897 and many users have done so.
3900 Installing New Document Classes,
3908 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3915 name "subsec:Modules"
3920 \begin_inset Index idx
3925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3927 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3944 \begin_layout Standard
3945 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
3946 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3947 This is not available in any document class,
3948 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
3954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3958 \begin_inset Index idx
3963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3965 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3980 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
3983 \begin_layout Standard
3984 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3985 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
3987 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
3988 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3989 You can still use the module while editing your file,
3990 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
3991 since \SpecialChar LyX
3992 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3993 file without the missing prerequisites.
3994 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
3995 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3998 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4002 \begin_inset Index idx
4007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4008 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4027 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4030 \begin_layout Standard
4031 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4040 Some modules require other modules,
4041 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4043 will advise you about these things.
4051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4055 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4060 \begin_inset Index idx
4065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 \begin_layout Standard
4085 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4086 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4088 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4089 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4090 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4093 a particular document has very special needs,
4094 but you need a specific inset or text style only that one time.
4095 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4097 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4115 manual for information on how to use it.
4118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4122 \begin_layout Standard
4123 Each class has a default set of options.
4124 Here's a quick table describing them:
4127 \begin_layout Standard
4128 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4136 \begin_inset Tabular
4137 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4138 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4139 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4597 \begin_layout Standard
4598 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4604 \begin_layout Standard
4605 You're probably also wondering what
4606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4610 \begin_inset space ~
4614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4618 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4619 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4625 the rest do not and begin instead with the
4630 Some document classes,
4631 such as the ones for letters,
4632 don't use any section headings.
4653 We will describe these headings fully in section
4654 \begin_inset space ~
4658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4660 reference "subsec:Headings"
4668 \begin_layout Subsection
4670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4672 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4677 \begin_inset Index idx
4682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4684 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4699 \begin_inset Index idx
4704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4706 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4723 \begin_layout Standard
4724 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4733 \begin_inset space ~
4741 \begin_inset space ~
4747 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
4748 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4749 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
4750 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4751 -class and its options,
4752 you have to read its manual.
4755 \begin_layout Standard
4759 \begin_inset space ~
4766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4772 \begin_inset space ~
4777 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4778 You can choose between the following five options:
4781 \begin_layout Labeling
4782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4787 Use default page style of current class.
4790 \begin_layout Labeling
4791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4796 No page numbers or headings.
4799 \begin_layout Labeling
4800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4808 \begin_layout Labeling
4809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4814 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4815 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4816 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
4819 \begin_layout Labeling
4820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4825 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4831 \begin_inset Index idx
4836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4839 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4854 How they are defined is explained in section
4855 \begin_inset space ~
4859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4861 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4869 \begin_layout Standard
4870 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4871 \begin_inset space ~
4875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4877 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4885 \begin_layout Subsection
4886 Paper Size and Orientation
4887 \begin_inset Index idx
4892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4894 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4911 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 You can find the following options in the menu
4922 \begin_inset space ~
4929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4933 \begin_inset Index idx
4938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4940 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4957 \begin_layout Labeling
4958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4962 \begin_inset space ~
4967 What size paper to print on.
4972 \begin_layout Itemize
4978 \begin_layout Itemize
4984 \begin_layout Itemize
4990 \begin_layout Itemize
4996 \begin_layout Itemize
5004 \begin_layout Itemize
5010 \begin_layout Itemize
5017 \begin_layout Labeling
5018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5023 To choose whether to output as
5034 \begin_layout Labeling
5035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5039 \begin_inset space ~
5044 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5045 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5048 \begin_layout Subsection
5050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5052 name "subsec:Margins"
5057 \begin_inset Index idx
5062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5064 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5079 \begin_inset Index idx
5084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5093 \begin_layout Standard
5094 Paper margins are set in the menu
5096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5100 \begin_inset Index idx
5105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5107 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5126 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5129 \begin_layout Subsection
5133 \begin_layout Standard
5134 If you change a document class,
5136 has to convert everything into the new class.
5137 That includes the paragraph environments.
5138 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5139 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5140 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5141 If this is the case,
5142 and you change the document class,
5144 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5153 The name of the style is retained,
5154 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5155 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5156 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5159 \begin_layout Section
5160 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5161 \begin_inset Index idx
5166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5168 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 \begin_layout Subsection
5187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5189 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5196 \begin_layout Standard
5197 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5198 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5201 \begin_layout Standard
5202 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5203 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5204 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5205 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5209 paragraph of a section,
5220 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5221 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5223 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5226 \begin_layout Standard
5227 The space between paragraphs,
5228 like the line spacing,
5229 the space between headings and text —
5231 all the spacing for just about everything —
5232 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5235 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5239 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5242 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5243 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5250 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5251 goes to produce a printable file.
5257 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5259 gives you the ability globally to change
5263 these pre-coded spacings.
5264 We will explain more later.
5267 \begin_layout Subsection
5268 Paragraph Separation
5269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5271 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5276 \begin_inset Index idx
5281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5300 \begin_layout Standard
5308 \begin_inset space ~
5316 \begin_inset space ~
5323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5327 \begin_inset Index idx
5332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5334 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5348 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5352 \begin_layout Subsection
5356 \begin_layout Standard
5357 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5360 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5362 \begin_inset space ~
5367 dialog and toggle the
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5375 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5378 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5382 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5383 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5390 \begin_layout Subsection
5392 \begin_inset Index idx
5397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5399 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5416 \begin_layout Standard
5419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5423 \begin_inset Index idx
5428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5430 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5444 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5447 \begin_inset space ~
5456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5457 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5463 \begin_inset Index idx
5468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5471 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5485 installed to use this feature.
5490 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5494 \begin_inset space ~
5499 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
5502 \begin_layout Section
5503 Paragraph Environments
5504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5506 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5511 \begin_inset Index idx
5516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5518 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5533 \begin_inset Index idx
5538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5539 Paragraph environments
5547 \begin_layout Subsection
5551 \begin_layout Standard
5552 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5555 \begin_layout Standard
5564 } \SpecialChar ldots
5574 \begin_inset Newline newline
5577 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5579 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5581 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
5582 we urge you to read the
5591 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5594 \begin_layout Standard
5595 A paragraph environment is simply a
5596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5603 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5604 This can include a particular style of font,
5611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5618 the different environments inside one another,
5619 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
5620 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
5621 on the fly margin adjustment,
5622 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
5623 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
5624 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5627 \begin_layout Standard
5628 To choose a new paragraph environment,
5629 use the pull-down box
5630 \begin_inset Graphics
5631 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5637 at the left end of the toolbar.
5639 will change the environment of the
5643 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5644 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
5647 \begin_layout Standard
5656 create a new paragraph using the
5660 paragraph environment.
5662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5669 because if you are in one of these environments:
5672 \begin_layout Itemize
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 \begin_layout Itemize
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 \begin_layout Itemize
5702 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 \begin_layout Itemize
5714 \begin_layout Standard
5716 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5721 rather than resetting it to
5726 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5727 \begin_inset space ~
5731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5733 reference "sec:Nesting"
5741 \begin_layout Subsection
5745 \begin_layout Standard
5746 The default paragraph environment is
5751 It creates a plain paragraph.
5753 resets the paragraph environment,
5754 this is the one it chooses.
5756 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
5763 \begin_layout Standard
5764 You can nest a paragraph using the
5768 environment in just about anything else,
5769 but you can't really nest anything in a
5776 \begin_layout Subsection
5778 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5785 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5804 title page has three parts:
5806 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
5807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5814 for thanks or contact information.
5815 For certain types of documents,
5817 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
5818 For other types of documents,
5820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5827 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5830 \begin_layout Standard
5832 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
5847 Here's how you use them:
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 Put the title of your document in the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5859 Put the author name in the
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5867 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
5868 want to use a fixed date,
5869 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
5870 put that text in the
5875 Note that using this environment is optional.
5876 If you don't provide any,
5878 will automatically insert today's date.
5879 If you don't want a date,
5882 Suppress default date on front page
5886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5887 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5889 \begin_inset space ~
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 You can use footnotes to insert
5899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5906 or contact information.
5909 \begin_layout Subsection
5911 \begin_inset Index idx
5916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5925 name "subsec:Headings"
5932 \begin_layout Standard
5933 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5935 takes care of the numbering for you.
5938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5940 \begin_inset Index idx
5945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5947 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 \begin_layout Standard
5965 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5969 \begin_layout Enumerate
5975 \begin_layout Enumerate
5981 \begin_layout Enumerate
5987 \begin_layout Enumerate
5993 \begin_layout Enumerate
5999 \begin_layout Enumerate
6005 \begin_layout Enumerate
6011 \begin_layout Standard
6013 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6014 separated by periods.
6015 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6016 Unlike the other headings,
6017 parts are numbered with Roman numerals.
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6021 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6023 suppose you're writing a book.
6024 You group the book into chapters.
6026 does a similar grouping:
6029 \begin_layout Itemize
6034 is divided into either
6045 \begin_layout Itemize
6057 \begin_layout Itemize
6069 \begin_layout Itemize
6081 \begin_layout Itemize
6093 \begin_layout Itemize
6105 \begin_layout Standard
6106 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6115 Not all document types use the
6119 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6124 is the top-level heading.
6132 \begin_layout Standard
6138 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6140 labels it with its number,
6141 along with the number of the subsection,
6144 chapter that it's in.
6146 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6159 \begin_inset Index idx
6164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6166 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6183 \begin_layout Standard
6184 The unnumbered section headings have a
6185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6192 at the end of their name.
6193 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6195 \begin_inset space ~
6199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6209 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6210 Changing the Numbering
6211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6213 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6220 \begin_layout Standard
6221 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6223 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6224 that's preset in the document class.
6225 Just as certain classes start with
6240 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6250 This is something you can change.
6253 \begin_layout Standard
6256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6260 \begin_inset Index idx
6265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6267 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6288 \begin_inset space ~
6293 you will see two counters.
6298 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6299 numbers a section heading.
6300 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6304 Short Titles of Headings
6305 \begin_inset Index idx
6310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6312 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6327 \begin_inset Argument 1
6330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6339 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Some section or chapter titles,
6350 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6352 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6353 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6356 \begin_layout Standard
6358 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6359 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6360 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6361 To specify a short title,
6362 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6366 \begin_inset space ~
6372 This will insert a box labeled
6373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6377 \begin_inset space ~
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6385 This also works for captions inside floats.
6386 There can only be one short title per title.
6389 \begin_layout Standard
6390 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6397 \begin_layout Standard
6398 The following information applies to all section headings:
6401 \begin_layout Itemize
6402 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6405 \begin_layout Itemize
6406 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6409 \begin_layout Itemize
6410 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6413 \begin_layout Itemize
6414 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6417 \begin_layout Subsection
6421 \begin_layout Standard
6423 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6439 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6440 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6441 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6442 They also allow nesting,
6452 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6455 \begin_layout Standard
6456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6465 when you start a new paragraph.
6467 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6474 once you are done typing in that poem,
6475 you have to change back to the
6479 environment yourself.
6482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6491 \begin_inset Index idx
6496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6505 \begin_layout Standard
6506 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
6507 it's time for the differences.
6516 are identical except for one difference:
6521 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6530 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6534 Here's an example of the
6548 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
6549 See – no indentation!
6553 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6555 there's no indentation,
6556 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
6559 \begin_layout Standard
6560 Here's another example,
6568 \begin_layout Quotation
6575 you will see the indentation.
6576 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
6581 is the environment for you!
6587 you were quoting other text.
6590 \begin_layout Quotation
6591 Here's a new paragraph.
6592 I could ramble on and on,
6593 like a politician at election time.
6599 \begin_layout Standard
6600 As the examples show,
6605 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6606 They should put quotes in the
6611 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6615 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6620 \begin_inset Index idx
6625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6627 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6642 \begin_inset Index idx
6647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6668 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
6677 \begin_inset Newline newline
6680 Which I did not rehearse!
6684 It could be much worse.
6685 This line could be long,
6688 so very long that it wraps around.
6689 It looks okay on screen,
6690 but in the printed version,
6691 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
6693 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6699 \begin_inset Newline newline
6702 And make things look fine
6703 \begin_inset Newline newline
6709 arg "newline-insert newline"
6715 \begin_layout Standard
6721 does not indent both margins.
6722 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6723 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
6727 arg "newline-insert newline"
6733 \begin_layout Subsection
6735 \begin_inset Index idx
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6756 \begin_layout Standard
6758 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
6769 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
6781 lets you provide your own label.
6782 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
6785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6790 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
6793 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6802 reset the environment to
6806 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6807 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6808 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
6812 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6816 If you do this at the top level of a list,
6817 it returns you to the
6824 \begin_layout Standard
6825 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6828 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
6829 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
6830 we suggest you read all of section
6831 \begin_inset space ~
6835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6837 reference "sec:Nesting"
6845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6847 \begin_inset Index idx
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6878 \begin_layout Standard
6879 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6883 paragraph environment.
6884 It has the following properties:
6887 \begin_layout Itemize
6888 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6892 \begin_layout Itemize
6894 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6897 \begin_layout Itemize
6898 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6902 \begin_layout Itemize
6903 The items can have any length.
6905 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6906 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6913 \begin_layout Itemize
6918 environment inside another
6923 the label changes to a new symbol.
6927 \begin_layout Itemize
6928 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6931 \begin_layout Itemize
6933 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6936 \begin_layout Itemize
6938 \begin_inset space ~
6942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6944 reference "sec:Nesting"
6949 for a full explanation of nesting.
6953 \begin_layout Standard
6955 that explanation was also an example of an
6964 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6969 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6972 \begin_layout Itemize
6973 The label for the first level
6977 is a large black dot,
6982 \begin_layout Itemize
6983 The label for the second level is a dash.
6987 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6992 \begin_layout Itemize
6993 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6997 \begin_layout Itemize
6998 Back out to the third level.
7002 \begin_layout Itemize
7003 Back to the second level.
7007 \begin_layout Itemize
7008 Back to the outermost level.
7011 \begin_layout Standard
7012 These are the default labels for an
7017 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7019 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7022 dialog in the submenu
7027 \begin_inset Index idx
7032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7048 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7052 \begin_layout Standard
7053 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7054 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7055 \begin_inset space ~
7059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7061 reference "sec:Nesting"
7069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7071 \begin_inset Index idx
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7095 name "sec:Enumerate"
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7107 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7108 It has these properties:
7111 \begin_layout Enumerate
7112 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7116 \begin_layout Enumerate
7117 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7121 \begin_layout Enumerate
7123 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7126 \begin_layout Enumerate
7131 environment resets the counter to one.
7134 \begin_layout Enumerate
7148 \begin_layout Enumerate
7149 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7150 Items can have any length.
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7157 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7161 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7166 \begin_layout Standard
7176 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7178 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7179 labels the four different levels in an
7186 \begin_layout Enumerate
7187 The first level of an
7191 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7195 \begin_layout Enumerate
7196 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7200 \begin_layout Enumerate
7201 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7205 \begin_layout Enumerate
7206 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7209 \begin_layout Enumerate
7211 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7215 \begin_layout Enumerate
7216 Back to the third level
7220 \begin_layout Enumerate
7221 Back to the second level.
7225 \begin_layout Enumerate
7226 Back to the outermost level.
7229 \begin_layout Standard
7230 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7236 \begin_inset space ~
7240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7242 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7248 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7249 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7253 \begin_layout Standard
7254 There is more to nesting
7258 environments than we've stated here.
7259 You should read section
7260 \begin_inset space ~
7264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7266 reference "sec:Nesting"
7271 to learn more about nesting.
7274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7276 \begin_inset Index idx
7281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7301 Unlike the previous two environments,
7306 list has no fixed label.
7310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7317 of the first line as the label.
7321 \begin_layout Description
7323 This is an example of the
7330 \begin_layout Standard
7332 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7344 it is meant that the first usage of the
7348 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7349 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7357 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7363 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7365 \begin_inset space ~
7372 \begin_inset space ~
7376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7378 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7383 for more information.) Here is an example:
7386 \begin_layout Description
7388 \begin_inset space ~
7392 This one shows how to use a
7395 \begin_inset space ~
7407 \begin_layout Description
7413 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7414 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7415 It's not a good idea to use a
7419 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7420 You're better off using
7432 paragraphs into them.
7435 \begin_layout Description
7441 environments inside one another,
7442 nest them in other types of lists,
7446 \begin_layout Standard
7447 Notice that after the first line,
7449 indents subsequent lines,
7450 offsetting them from the first line.
7453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7455 \begin_inset Index idx
7460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7462 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7479 \begin_layout Standard
7484 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7485 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7489 \begin_layout Standard
7498 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
7499 Here are its properties:
7502 \begin_layout Labeling
7503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7508 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7517 of each line as the item label.
7522 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7523 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
7524 use a non-breaking space as described above.
7527 \begin_layout Labeling
7528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7529 margins As you can see,
7531 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
7532 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
7533 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
7536 \begin_layout Labeling
7537 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7539 \begin_inset space ~
7542 width \SpecialChar LyX
7543 uses the width of the label,
7544 or the default width,
7546 If the label width is larger,
7548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7555 into the first line.
7557 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
7560 \begin_layout Labeling
7561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7566 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
7570 environment has the same left margin.
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7574 To change the default width,
7575 select all items in the list.
7578 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7580 \begin_inset space ~
7585 dialog (toolbar button
7588 arg "layout-paragraph"
7595 \begin_inset space ~
7600 determines the default label width.
7601 You can use the text of your largest label here,
7602 but you can also use the letter
7603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7610 multiple times instead.
7611 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7621 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7624 \begin_inset space ~
7629 every time you alter a label in a
7634 \begin_inset Newline newline
7637 The predefined default width is the length of
7638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7646 \begin_inset space ~
7652 \begin_layout Standard
7657 list the same way as the
7662 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
7667 environment gives you another way to do this,
7668 using a different overall layout.
7671 \begin_layout Standard
7676 lists inside one another,
7677 nest them in other types of lists,
7679 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7681 \begin_inset space ~
7685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7687 reference "sec:Nesting"
7692 to learn about nesting.
7695 \begin_layout Standard
7696 There is yet another feature of the
7701 As you can see in the examples,
7703 left-justifies the item labels by default.
7704 You can use additional
7708 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7709 justifies the item label.
7714 are documented in section
7715 \begin_inset space ~
7719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7721 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7727 Here are some examples:
7730 \begin_layout Labeling
7731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7732 Left The default for
7739 \begin_layout Labeling
7740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7741 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7748 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7751 \begin_layout Labeling
7752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7753 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7757 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7764 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7767 \begin_layout Subsection
7769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7771 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7776 \begin_inset Index idx
7781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7783 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7800 \begin_layout Standard
7801 The features described in this section require that the module
7803 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7805 is loaded in the document settings.
7806 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7812 \begin_inset Index idx
7817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7820 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7838 Custom Enumerate Lists
7839 \begin_inset Index idx
7844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7846 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7856 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7873 \begin_layout Standard
7875 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
7877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7880 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7881 There you add the command
7884 \begin_layout Standard
7892 \begin_layout Standard
7904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7905 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7908 \begin_inset space ~
7912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7914 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7928 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7935 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7936 For capital Roman numerals replace
7948 in the command above.
7949 For Arabic numerals use
7957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7964 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7980 \begin_layout Standard
7982 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7991 You can only number 26
7992 \begin_inset space ~
7995 items with Latin letters,
7996 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8005 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8006 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8013 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8016 \begin_layout Enumerate
8017 \begin_inset Argument 1
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8046 \begin_layout Enumerate
8047 \begin_inset Argument 1
8050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8073 \begin_layout Enumerate
8078 \begin_layout Enumerate
8079 \begin_inset Argument 1
8082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8106 \begin_layout Enumerate
8107 \begin_inset Argument 1
8110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8136 \begin_layout Standard
8137 For this list these commands were used:
8140 \begin_layout Standard
8151 \begin_inset Newline newline
8159 \begin_inset Newline newline
8167 \begin_inset Newline newline
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8184 makes the label emphasized and
8193 \begin_layout Standard
8194 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8203 When you change the label of a list level,
8204 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8214 \begin_inset Index idx
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8221 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8231 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8248 \begin_layout Standard
8249 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8252 \begin_layout Enumerate
8253 \begin_inset Argument 1
8256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_inset Note Note
8278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8279 goes back to default numbering
8287 \begin_layout Enumerate
8291 \begin_layout Standard
8295 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8299 \begin_layout Standard
8300 To resume an enumeration,
8309 \begin_layout Standard
8310 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8319 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8320 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8331 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8332 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8337 \begin_layout Standard
8343 \begin_layout Standard
8348 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8352 \begin_layout Enumerate
8356 \begin_layout Enumerate
8360 \begin_layout Standard
8361 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8364 \begin_layout Enumerate
8365 \begin_inset Argument 1
8368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8384 This enumeration starts at 4
8387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8389 \begin_inset Index idx
8394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8413 \begin_layout Standard
8414 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8415 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8422 \begin_layout Itemize
8423 with standard spacing
8426 \begin_layout Standard
8427 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8428 Add there the command
8432 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8435 \begin_layout Itemize
8436 \begin_inset Argument 1
8439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8458 \begin_layout Itemize
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8466 \begin_layout Standard
8467 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8473 \begin_inset Index idx
8478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8481 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8496 For more information see its documentation,
8498 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8508 \begin_layout Standard
8509 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
8510 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8514 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8517 \begin_layout Enumerate
8518 \begin_inset Argument 1
8521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8543 \begin_layout Enumerate
8544 with negative indentation
8547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8548 Further Customization
8549 \begin_inset Index idx
8554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8556 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8573 \begin_layout Standard
8574 You can also change the style of description lists.
8578 \begin_layout Standard
8584 \begin_layout Standard
8585 changes the description label font,
8589 \begin_layout Standard
8595 \begin_layout Standard
8596 sets the list style.
8599 \begin_layout Standard
8600 An example where the command
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8612 \begin_layout Standard
8616 \begin_layout Description
8618 \begin_inset space ~
8623 \begin_inset Argument 1
8626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8647 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
8648 therefore ionizing them.
8651 \begin_layout Description
8653 \begin_inset space ~
8657 In computer science,
8658 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
8660 or handles to a resource such as an object,
8662 disk space or other resource.
8665 \begin_layout Standard
8666 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8672 \begin_inset Index idx
8677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8680 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8695 For more information see its documentation
8696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8706 \begin_layout Subsection
8708 \begin_inset Index idx
8713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8724 \begin_inset space ~
8731 \begin_layout Standard
8732 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8733 has document classes for letters,
8734 we've also created two paragraph environments called
8741 \begin_inset space ~
8747 To use the letter class,
8748 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
8749 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8750 gags on the document.
8759 \begin_inset space ~
8764 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8765 You can even nest them inside other environments,
8766 though you can't nest anything in them.
8769 \begin_layout Standard
8771 you're not limited to using
8778 \begin_inset space ~
8787 \begin_inset space ~
8794 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
8797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8801 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8808 \begin_layout Standard
8813 environment formats text in the style of an address,
8814 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
8819 \begin_inset space ~
8824 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
8825 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8826 Here's an example of each:
8829 \begin_layout Right Address
8831 \begin_inset Newline newline
8835 \begin_inset Newline newline
8839 \begin_inset Newline newline
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset space ~
8856 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
8857 which \SpecialChar LyX
8858 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
8859 Here's an example of the
8866 \begin_layout Address
8868 \begin_inset Newline newline
8871 Where do I send this
8872 \begin_inset Newline newline
8875 Your post office and country
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8887 \begin_inset space ~
8892 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8897 in either of these environments,
8899 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
8914 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8923 arg "newline-insert newline"
8928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8929 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8931 \begin_inset space ~
8935 \begin_inset space ~
8940 ) to start a new line in an
8947 \begin_inset space ~
8955 \begin_layout Subsection
8959 \begin_layout Standard
8960 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
8962 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8967 \begin_inset Index idx
8972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8986 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8988 you could use this environment anywhere,
8989 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
8992 don't bother trying to nest
8996 in anything else or vice versa.
9002 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9003 The book document classes ignores the
9008 and it's utterly silly to use
9012 in a letter document class.
9015 \begin_layout Standard
9020 environment does several things for you.
9022 it puts the centered label
9023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9031 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9033 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9034 just as you'd expect.
9036 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9038 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9040 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9043 \begin_layout Standard
9044 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9048 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9049 The new paragraph will still be in the
9055 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Float figure
9066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9068 \begin_inset Graphics
9069 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9077 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9082 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9103 \begin_layout Standard
9104 We would love to demonstrate the
9109 but since this document is in the
9110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9119 We inserted it therefore as figure
9120 \begin_inset space ~
9124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9126 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9132 If you have never heard of an
9133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9141 you can safely ignore this environment.
9144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9146 \begin_inset Index idx
9151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9160 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9172 environment is used to list references.
9174 you could use this environment anywhere,
9175 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 When you first open a
9194 adds a large vertical space,
9195 followed by the heading
9196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9211 depending on the document class.
9212 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9213 Each paragraph of the
9217 environment is a bibliography entry.
9223 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9224 Each new paragraph is still in the
9231 \begin_layout Standard
9233 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9235 For more information on that,
9236 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9237 's bibliography handling,
9238 have a look at section
9239 \begin_inset space ~
9243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9245 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9253 \begin_layout Subsection
9254 Special Environments
9257 \begin_layout Standard
9259 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9267 \begin_inset Index idx
9272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9282 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9289 \begin_layout Standard
9295 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9297 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9302 key as a fixed whitespace.
9306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9320 \begin_inset space ~
9325 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9344 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9346 If you need to insert blank lines,
9347 you will still need to use
9350 arg "newline-insert newline"
9369 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9371 when you finish using the
9377 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9384 environment inside of others.
9387 \begin_layout Standard
9388 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9391 \begin_layout Itemize
9395 arg "newline-insert newline"
9398 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9403 \begin_inset space \space{}
9413 arg "newline-insert newline"
9419 \begin_layout Itemize
9423 arg "newline-insert newline"
9433 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9439 \begin_layout Itemize
9440 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9441 You must put at least one
9445 in any line you want blank.
9451 \begin_layout Itemize
9452 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9456 since that will insert
9461 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9464 arg "self-insert \""
9470 \begin_layout Standard
9474 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9478 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9482 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9486 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9490 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9491 printf("Hello World!
9496 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9500 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9504 \begin_layout Standard
9505 This is just the standard
9506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9516 \begin_layout Standard
9524 such as program source,
9525 shell scripts and so on.
9526 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
9527 \begin_inset Index idx
9532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9533 Paragraph environments
9538 For longer parts of programming code,
9539 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
9541 Program Code Listings
9546 \begin_inset space ~
9554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9558 \begin_inset Index idx
9563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9572 \begin_layout Standard
9577 environment is similar to the
9582 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
9587 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9601 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a non-breaking space) and you can have empty lines.
9615 \begin_layout Itemize
9616 have a certain language and a text style
9619 \begin_layout Itemize
9622 foot- and margin notes,
9626 index- and nomenclature entries,
9631 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
9635 \begin_layout Standard
9636 Because of these properties
9640 works like a typewriter.
9644 \begin_layout Verbatim
9648 \begin_layout Verbatim
9651 The following 2 lines are empty:
9654 \begin_layout Verbatim
9658 \begin_layout Verbatim
9662 \begin_layout Verbatim
9663 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9673 environment is identical to
9677 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9678 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9685 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9689 \begin_layout Section
9690 Nesting Environments
9691 \begin_inset Index idx
9696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9698 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9722 \begin_layout Subsection
9726 \begin_layout Standard
9728 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
9729 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
9730 For example you have three main points in an outline,
9731 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
9733 you have a list inside of another list,
9735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9745 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9754 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 \begin_layout Enumerate
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9767 \begin_layout Standard
9768 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9769 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
9772 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9774 \begin_inset space ~
9778 \begin_inset space ~
9786 \begin_inset space ~
9790 \begin_inset space ~
9795 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
9796 Instead of the menu,
9797 you can also use the toolbar buttons
9800 arg "depth-increment"
9806 arg "depth-decrement"
9820 arg "depth-increment"
9826 arg "depth-decrement"
9830 The change will work on the current selection,
9831 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
9832 or the current paragraph.
9835 \begin_layout Standard
9836 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9837 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9838 If it is invalid to do so,
9839 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9841 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
9842 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9845 \begin_layout Standard
9846 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9849 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
9850 as you're about to find out.
9851 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9854 \begin_layout Subsection
9855 What You Can and Can't Nest
9858 \begin_layout Standard
9859 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
9860 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9863 \begin_layout Standard
9864 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
9865 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9868 \begin_layout Itemize
9869 Completely unnestable
9872 \begin_layout Itemize
9874 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
9877 \begin_layout Itemize
9879 you can nest them into other environments,
9880 but you can't nest anything into them.
9883 \begin_layout Standard
9884 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
9885 and which paragraph environments have them:
9888 \begin_layout Description
9889 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9890 Can't nest into them.
9894 \begin_layout Itemize
9900 \begin_layout Itemize
9906 \begin_layout Itemize
9912 \begin_layout Itemize
9918 \begin_layout Itemize
9925 \begin_layout Description
9927 \begin_inset space ~
9930 Nestable You can nest them.
9931 You can nest other things into them.
9935 \begin_layout Itemize
9941 \begin_layout Itemize
9947 \begin_layout Itemize
9953 \begin_layout Itemize
9959 \begin_layout Itemize
9965 \begin_layout Itemize
9971 \begin_layout Itemize
9977 \begin_layout Itemize
9984 \begin_layout Itemize
9990 \begin_layout Itemize
9997 \begin_layout Description
9998 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9999 You can't nest anything into them.
10003 \begin_layout Itemize
10009 \begin_layout Itemize
10015 \begin_layout Itemize
10021 \begin_layout Itemize
10027 \begin_layout Itemize
10033 \begin_layout Itemize
10039 \begin_layout Itemize
10045 \begin_layout Itemize
10051 \begin_layout Itemize
10057 \begin_layout Itemize
10063 \begin_layout Itemize
10069 \begin_layout Itemize
10075 \begin_layout Itemize
10081 \begin_layout Itemize
10085 \begin_inset space ~
10091 \begin_layout Itemize
10098 \begin_layout Standard
10099 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10108 Although it is possible,
10110 to nest numbered section headings like
10121 \begin_inset space ~
10125 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10133 \begin_layout Subsection
10134 Nesting Other Things:
10139 \begin_inset Index idx
10144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10146 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10163 \begin_layout Standard
10164 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10165 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10169 \begin_layout Itemize
10173 \begin_layout Itemize
10177 \begin_layout Itemize
10181 \begin_layout Standard
10183 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 Figures and tables in
10196 are not affected by this.
10201 Have a look at section
10202 \begin_inset space ~
10206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10208 reference "sec:Floats"
10213 for more information about
10220 \begin_layout Standard
10222 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10225 or an equation is inline,
10226 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10229 \begin_layout Standard
10231 if you have an equation,
10232 figure or table in a
10233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10241 it behaves just like a
10242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10249 paragraph environment.
10250 You can nest it into any environment,
10251 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10254 \begin_layout Standard
10255 Here's an example with a table:
10258 \begin_layout Enumerate
10263 \begin_layout Enumerate
10264 This is (a) and it's nested.
10268 \begin_layout Standard
10269 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10275 \begin_layout Standard
10277 \begin_inset Tabular
10278 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10279 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10280 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10281 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10365 \begin_layout Standard
10366 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10373 \begin_layout Enumerate
10375 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10379 \begin_layout Enumerate
10383 \begin_layout Standard
10384 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10385 the list would look like this:
10388 \begin_layout Enumerate
10393 \begin_layout Enumerate
10394 This is (a) and it's nested.
10398 \begin_layout Standard
10399 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10405 \begin_layout Standard
10407 \begin_inset Tabular
10408 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10409 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10502 \begin_layout Enumerate
10510 it's not nested at all.
10513 \begin_layout Enumerate
10517 \begin_layout Standard
10518 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
10519 but is also the first item of a new list!
10522 \begin_layout Standard
10523 There's another trap you can fall into:
10525 but not going deep enough.
10527 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10530 \begin_layout Enumerate
10535 \begin_layout Enumerate
10536 This is (a) and it's nested.
10539 \begin_layout Standard
10540 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10546 \begin_layout Standard
10548 \begin_inset Tabular
10549 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10550 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10551 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10552 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10644 \begin_layout Enumerate
10646 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
10654 \begin_layout Enumerate
10658 \begin_layout Standard
10660 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
10666 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10668 if you nest tables,
10669 figures or equations,
10670 make sure you go to the right depth!
10673 \begin_layout Subsection
10674 Usage and General Features
10677 \begin_layout Standard
10678 Speaking of levels,
10680 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10690 is the innermost possible depth.
10691 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10694 \begin_layout Enumerate
10695 level #1 – outermost
10699 \begin_layout Enumerate
10704 \begin_layout Enumerate
10709 \begin_layout Enumerate
10714 \begin_layout Itemize
10719 \begin_layout Itemize
10728 \begin_layout Standard
10729 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
10730 and you can see both of them in the example.
10731 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
10732 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
10742 if we tried to nest another
10747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10755 we would get errors.
10758 \begin_layout Subsection
10760 \begin_inset Index idx
10765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10767 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10784 \begin_layout Standard
10785 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10786 We have several examples of nested environments.
10788 we explain how we created the example,
10789 so that you can reproduce them.
10792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10794 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10797 \begin_layout Labeling
10798 \labelwidthstring MMM
10799 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10808 \begin_layout Labeling
10809 \labelwidthstring MMM
10810 #2-a This is level #2.
10811 We created it by using
10814 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10820 arg "depth-increment"
10827 \begin_layout Labeling
10828 \labelwidthstring MMM
10829 #3-a This is level #3.
10839 arg "depth-increment"
10843 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10847 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10853 arg "depth-increment"
10860 \begin_layout Standard
10867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10877 We did this by entering
10880 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10887 arg "depth-increment"
10891 then changing the paragraph environment to
10896 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
10897 it also works for the
10914 \begin_layout Standard
10924 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10930 \begin_layout Labeling
10931 \labelwidthstring MMM
10932 #4-a This is level #4.
10936 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10939 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10945 we can't nest anything inside a
10950 which is why we're still at level #4.
10956 keep nesting things inside
10957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10968 \begin_layout Labeling
10969 \labelwidthstring MMM
10970 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10975 \begin_layout Labeling
10976 \labelwidthstring MMM
10977 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10978 and this is level #6.
10980 you should know how we made these two.
10984 \begin_layout Labeling
10985 \labelwidthstring MMM
10986 #5-b Back to level #5.
10990 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10996 arg "depth-decrement"
11003 \begin_layout Labeling
11004 \labelwidthstring MMM
11008 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11014 arg "depth-decrement"
11018 we're back at level #4.
11022 \begin_layout Labeling
11023 \labelwidthstring MMM
11024 #3-b Back to level #3.
11025 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11029 \begin_layout Labeling
11030 \labelwidthstring MMM
11031 #2-b Back to level #2.
11035 \begin_layout Labeling
11036 \labelwidthstring MMM
11038 back to the outermost level,
11040 After this sentence,
11045 and change the paragraph environment back to
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11053 We could have also used the
11072 environment in place of the
11077 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11085 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11086 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11091 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11101 arg "depth-increment"
11106 \begin_inset Newline newline
11110 we will change to the
11118 \begin_layout Enumerate
11127 \begin_layout Enumerate
11128 Notice how the nested
11132 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11137 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11141 \begin_layout Standard
11142 We ended this example by entering
11148 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11152 and reset the nesting depth by using
11155 arg "depth-decrement"
11161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11174 \begin_inset Argument 1
11177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 Levels and other list environments
11188 \begin_layout Enumerate
11194 paragraph environment.
11195 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11199 \begin_layout Enumerate
11204 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11210 arg "depth-increment"
11215 what happens if we nest an
11219 environment inside of this one?
11220 It will be at level #3,
11221 but what will its label be?
11226 \begin_layout Itemize
11238 even though it's at level #3.
11240 its label is a bullet.
11241 (We got here by using
11244 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11251 arg "depth-increment"
11255 then changing the environment to
11263 \begin_layout Itemize
11268 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11275 arg "depth-increment"
11279 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11284 \begin_layout Enumerate
11286 to get to level #5.
11289 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11294 Notice the type of numbering,
11300 because we are in the
11308 environment (that is,
11324 \begin_layout Enumerate
11329 change the paragraph environment,
11330 but decrease the nesting depth?
11331 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11335 \begin_layout Enumerate
11337 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11341 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11344 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11347 \begin_layout Enumerate
11351 arg "depth-decrement"
11354 to decrease the depth after the next
11357 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11364 \begin_layout Enumerate
11366 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11371 \begin_layout Enumerate
11373 Even though we've changed levels,
11375 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11378 \begin_layout Enumerate
11380 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11392 that \SpecialChar LyX
11397 reset the counter for the label.
11401 \begin_layout Enumerate
11405 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11411 arg "depth-decrement"
11415 and we're back to level #2.
11417 we not only changed the nesting depth,
11418 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
11426 \begin_layout Enumerate
11427 The same thing happens if we do another
11430 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11436 arg "depth-decrement"
11439 sequence and return to level #1,
11440 the outermost level.
11443 \begin_layout Standard
11445 we reset the environment to
11451 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
11461 The number of other
11465 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11471 The same rule applies for the
11479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11484 \begin_layout Enumerate
11485 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11486 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
11487 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11506 arg "depth-increment"
11515 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
11517 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11518 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11519 Either before or after this,
11520 we will put in the level.
11524 \begin_layout Enumerate
11531 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11535 \begin_layout Verse
11536 Now we will add verse.
11537 \begin_inset Newline newline
11540 It will get much worse.
11541 \begin_inset Newline newline
11552 arg "depth-increment"
11564 \begin_layout Verse
11567 \begin_inset Newline newline
11570 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11571 \begin_inset Newline newline
11577 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11585 \begin_layout Verse
11586 Here comes a table:
11590 \begin_layout Standard
11591 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11597 \begin_layout Standard
11599 \begin_inset Tabular
11600 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11601 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11602 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11688 \begin_layout Verse
11692 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11704 arg "depth-increment"
11711 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11718 \begin_inset Newline newline
11726 arg "depth-decrement"
11733 \begin_layout Enumerate
11740 level #1) This is another item.
11741 Note that selecting a
11745 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
11746 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
11753 \begin_layout Quotation
11754 We're now ending the
11758 list and changing to
11763 We're still at level #1.
11764 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11765 The next set of paragraphs is a
11766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11773 We will nest both the
11780 \begin_inset space ~
11785 environments inside of this one,
11786 then use another nested
11790 for the letter body.
11794 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11797 to preserve the depth.
11798 Remember that you need to use
11801 arg "newline-insert newline"
11804 to create multiple lines inside the
11811 \begin_inset space ~
11821 \begin_layout Right Address
11823 \begin_inset Newline newline
11828 \begin_inset Newline newline
11834 \begin_layout Address
11836 \begin_inset space ~
11842 \begin_layout Quotation
11843 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11847 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11849 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
11850 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
11851 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
11853 we thank you for your patience.
11856 \begin_layout Quotation
11859 now have a special on beef.
11860 If you are interested,
11861 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
11862 along with payment.
11865 \begin_layout Quotation
11866 We thank you again for your patience.
11869 \begin_layout Address
11871 \begin_inset Newline newline
11878 \begin_layout Quotation
11879 That ends that example!
11882 \begin_layout Standard
11884 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11885 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
11886 We could have easily nested an
11908 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11911 \begin_layout Subsection
11913 \begin_inset Index idx
11918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11920 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11937 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11944 \begin_layout Standard
11945 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
11946 For example you need two different enumerations:
11949 \begin_layout Enumerate
11954 \begin_layout Enumerate
11959 \begin_layout Enumerate
11963 \begin_layout Standard
11964 \begin_inset Separator plain
11970 \begin_layout Itemize
11976 \begin_layout Standard
11977 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11983 \begin_layout Enumerate
11987 \begin_layout Enumerate
11991 \begin_layout Enumerate
11995 \begin_layout Standard
11996 To split an existing list into two lists,
11997 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
11999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12000 Separated <Name> Above
12004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12005 Separated <Name> Below
12008 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12009 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12010 Inside nested environments,
12011 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12014 \begin_layout Standard
12015 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12016 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12021 you get an environment separator when you press
12024 arg "paragraph-break"
12031 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12034 \begin_layout Section
12036 Pagination and Line Breaks
12037 \begin_inset Index idx
12042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12053 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12055 offers you more spaces:
12056 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12057 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12060 \begin_layout Subsection
12062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12064 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12076 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12093 \begin_layout Standard
12094 The non-breaking space:
12095 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12096 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 ) not to automatically break the line at that point.
12098 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12102 \begin_layout Quote
12103 Further documentation is given in section
12104 \begin_inset Newline newline
12108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12110 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12118 \begin_layout Standard
12120 it would be a good thing to put a non-breaking space between
12121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12135 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12145 A non-breaking space is set with
12147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12148 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12150 \begin_inset space ~
12158 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12164 \begin_layout Subsection
12166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12168 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12173 \begin_inset Index idx
12178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12180 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12197 \begin_layout Standard
12198 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12201 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 The length units are listed in Appendix
12206 \begin_inset space ~
12210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12212 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12224 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12229 \begin_inset Index idx
12234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12253 \begin_layout Standard
12254 With the introduction of typewriters,
12255 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12256 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12257 automatically takes care about this.
12259 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12261 \begin_inset space ~
12265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12267 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12273 To insert a normal space,
12276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12277 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12287 arg "space-insert normal"
12293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12294 Non-Breaking Thin Space
12295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12297 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12302 \begin_inset Index idx
12307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12309 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12326 \begin_layout Standard
12328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12331 non-breaking thin space
12332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12335 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12344 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
12346 inside abbreviations:
12349 \begin_layout Quote
12351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12355 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12358 \begin_layout Standard
12359 or between values and units.
12360 Compare for example this:
12361 \begin_inset Newline newline
12365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12369 \begin_inset Newline newline
12372 10 kg (normal space)
12375 \begin_layout Standard
12376 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12379 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12381 \begin_inset space ~
12385 \begin_inset space ~
12393 arg "space-insert thin"
12399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 You can also insert the following space types:
12407 \begin_layout Description
12409 \begin_inset space ~
12412 space A line with a
12413 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12417 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12421 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12424 medium space between the arrows.
12427 \begin_layout Description
12429 \begin_inset space ~
12432 space A line with a
12433 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12437 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12441 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12444 thick space between the arrows.
12447 \begin_layout Description
12449 \begin_inset space ~
12453 \begin_inset space ~
12456 space A line with a
12457 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12461 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12465 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12468 negative thin space between the arrows.
12471 \begin_layout Description
12473 \begin_inset space ~
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12480 space A line with a
12481 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12485 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12489 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12492 negative medium space between the arrows.
12495 \begin_layout Description
12497 \begin_inset space ~
12501 \begin_inset space ~
12504 space A line with a
12505 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12509 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12513 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12516 negative thick space between the arrows.
12519 \begin_layout Description
12521 \begin_inset space ~
12525 \begin_inset space ~
12529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12533 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12537 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12541 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12556 em) space between the arrows.
12559 \begin_layout Description
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12569 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12573 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12577 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12588 em) space between the arrows.
12591 \begin_layout Description
12593 \begin_inset space ~
12597 \begin_inset space ~
12601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12605 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12609 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12613 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12617 \begin_inset space ~
12621 \begin_inset space ~
12625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12628 em) space between the arrows.
12631 \begin_layout Description
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12641 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12646 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12653 cm space between the arrows.
12656 \begin_layout Standard
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12664 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12669 lists the different space sizes.
12672 \begin_layout Standard
12673 \begin_inset Float table
12680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12681 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12686 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12690 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 \begin_inset Tabular
12701 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12702 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12703 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12704 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12717 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12758 Non-breaking Normal
12763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12778 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12796 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12810 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12843 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12858 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12867 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12891 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12906 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12930 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12952 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13035 \begin_inset Index idx
13040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13042 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13059 \begin_layout Standard
13060 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13061 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13062 An Horizontal Fill is actually a variable length space,
13063 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13064 If there is more than one Horizontal Fill on a line,
13065 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13068 \begin_layout Standard
13069 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13072 \begin_layout Quote
13074 This is on the left side
13075 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13078 This is on the right
13081 \begin_layout Quote
13084 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13088 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13094 \begin_layout Quote
13097 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13101 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13105 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13111 \begin_layout Standard
13112 That was an example in the
13118 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13122 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13126 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13129 is one in a standard paragraph.
13130 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13135 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 Horizontal Fills can be made visible when you choose one of the
13142 \begin_inset space ~
13147 s in the space dialog:
13148 The following patterns are available:
13151 \begin_layout Standard
13154 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13164 \begin_layout Standard
13167 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13177 \begin_layout Standard
13180 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13190 \begin_layout Standard
13193 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13203 \begin_layout Standard
13204 Down brace (= opened downwards):
13206 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13210 \begin_inset space ~
13216 \begin_layout Standard
13217 Up brace (= opened upwards):
13219 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13230 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13239 If an Horizontal Fill is at the beginning of a line,
13244 in the first line in a paragraph,
13247 This prevents Horizontal Fills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13248 If you need space in this case anyway,
13253 option in the space dialog.
13261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13265 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13270 \begin_inset Index idx
13275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13294 \begin_layout Standard
13295 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13297 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13300 \begin_layout Standard
13301 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13304 What is correct English?:
13305 \begin_inset Newline newline
13309 \begin_inset Newline newline
13313 \begin_inset space ~
13316 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13317 \begin_inset Newline newline
13321 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13332 \begin_inset Newline newline
13336 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13347 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13353 \begin_layout Standard
13355 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13360 \begin_inset space ~
13364 \begin_inset space ~
13368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13373 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13376 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13380 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
13381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13385 \begin_inset space ~
13389 \begin_inset space ~
13393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13396 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13405 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13406 That is why it is named
13407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13415 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13416 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
13419 \begin_layout Subsection
13421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13423 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13428 \begin_inset Index idx
13433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13435 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13452 \begin_layout Standard
13453 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
13456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13457 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13459 \begin_inset space ~
13465 There you find the following sizes:
13468 \begin_layout Standard
13482 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13483 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13488 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13491 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13493 \begin_inset space ~
13499 \begin_inset Index idx
13504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13506 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13520 for the paragraph separation.
13521 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13532 \begin_layout Standard
13541 equal to the height,
13542 or half the height,
13543 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
13546 \begin_layout Standard
13552 \begin_inset Index idx
13557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13573 is a variable space,
13574 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
13576 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
13581 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
13582 because the space between them is then maximal.
13592 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
13596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13601 s are described in section
13602 \begin_inset space ~
13606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13608 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13618 If there are several
13623 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13624 You can therefore use
13628 s to center text on a page,
13629 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13632 \begin_layout Standard
13637 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13638 \begin_inset space ~
13642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13644 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13652 \begin_layout Standard
13653 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13664 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
13665 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13677 \begin_layout Subsection
13678 Paragraph Alignment
13679 \begin_inset Index idx
13684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13686 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13703 \begin_layout Standard
13704 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13706 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13709 dialog (toolbar button
13712 arg "layout-paragraph"
13716 There are five possibilities:
13719 \begin_layout Itemize
13727 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13733 \begin_layout Itemize
13741 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13747 \begin_layout Itemize
13755 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13761 \begin_layout Itemize
13769 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13775 \begin_layout Itemize
13783 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13789 \begin_layout Standard
13790 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
13791 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
13792 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
13793 and look like this:
13796 \begin_layout Standard
13798 This paragraph is right aligned,
13801 \begin_layout Standard
13803 this one is centered,
13806 \begin_layout Standard
13808 this one is left aligned.
13811 \begin_layout Subsection
13813 \begin_inset Index idx
13818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13820 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13837 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13844 \begin_layout Standard
13845 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13846 does the page breaks in your document,
13847 you can force a page break where you want one.
13848 Normally this will not be necessary,
13849 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13850 is good at page breaking.
13851 Only if you use a lot of
13857 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13860 \begin_layout Standard
13861 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13865 have to change the page breaking.
13868 \begin_layout Standard
13869 There are two types of page breaks:
13870 One that ends the page without any special action.
13871 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13874 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13876 \begin_inset space ~
13883 that is inserted via the menu
13885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13886 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13888 \begin_inset space ~
13894 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
13895 so that it fills out the complete page.
13896 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
13899 \begin_layout Standard
13900 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
13903 the wrong way to do it.
13905 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
13906 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13910 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13915 to learn more about
13922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13926 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13931 \begin_inset Index idx
13936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13938 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13955 \begin_layout Standard
13956 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
13957 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13958 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
13959 including unprocessed floats,
13960 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
13961 if necessary by adding pages.
13964 \begin_layout Standard
13965 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13967 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13968 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13970 \begin_inset space ~
13976 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
13977 you can use the menu
13979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13980 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13982 \begin_inset space ~
13986 \begin_inset space ~
13991 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
13992 if necessary by adding a page.
13995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13996 Suppressing Page Breaks
13997 \begin_inset Index idx
14002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14004 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14021 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14028 \begin_layout Standard
14029 To discourage page break at a certain point you can use
14031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14032 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14036 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14039 \begin_layout Subsection
14041 \begin_inset Index idx
14046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14055 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14062 \begin_layout Standard
14063 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14064 one simply breaks the line.
14065 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14068 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14074 \begin_inset space ~
14082 arg "newline-insert newline"
14086 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14089 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14091 \begin_inset space ~
14095 \begin_inset space ~
14103 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14106 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
14107 This is useful to avoid
14108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14115 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14118 \begin_layout Standard
14119 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14121 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14122 is very good at line breaking.
14125 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
14127 in a poem or for an address (see sections
14128 \begin_inset space ~
14132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14134 reference "sec:Quote"
14141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14143 reference "sec:Verse"
14149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14151 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14159 \begin_layout Subsection
14161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14163 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14168 \begin_inset Index idx
14173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14182 \begin_layout Standard
14184 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14195 \begin_layout Standard
14199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14200 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14202 \begin_inset space ~
14207 you can insert horizontal lines.
14208 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
14209 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14212 \begin_layout Standard
14214 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14225 \begin_layout Section
14226 Characters and Symbols
14229 \begin_layout Standard
14230 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14231 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
14233 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14241 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14246 for information on how this is done.
14249 \begin_layout Standard
14250 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
14255 dialog via the menu
14257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14258 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14264 \begin_layout Standard
14265 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14274 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14276 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14284 \begin_layout Section
14285 Fonts and Text Styles
14286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14288 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14295 \begin_layout Subsection
14297 \begin_inset Index idx
14302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14304 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14321 \begin_layout Standard
14322 There are two types of fonts:
14325 \begin_layout Description
14327 \begin_inset space ~
14331 \begin_inset Index idx
14336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14338 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14352 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14357 characters) in the font.
14358 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14359 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14360 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14361 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14362 \begin_inset Newline newline
14365 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14366 But to achieve a better quality,
14367 many fonts define several font sizes.
14368 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
14369 \begin_inset Newline newline
14385 \begin_inset space ~
14393 \begin_layout Description
14395 \begin_inset space ~
14399 \begin_inset Index idx
14404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14406 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14421 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
14422 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14424 they don't scale well,
14425 because in order to scale a glyph,
14426 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14427 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
14428 In order to mitigate this effect,
14429 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14430 \begin_inset space ~
14433 pixels high up to 34
14434 \begin_inset space ~
14437 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14438 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
14439 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
14440 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
14442 \begin_inset Newline newline
14445 Bitmap fonts are named
14448 \begin_inset space ~
14453 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14456 \begin_layout Standard
14457 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
14458 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
14459 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
14460 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
14463 \begin_layout Standard
14464 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
14465 look at its document properties.
14468 \begin_layout Standard
14469 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying text styles rather than specifying a particular font.
14471 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
14472 to emphasize text you use an
14473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14481 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
14483 In \SpecialChar LyX
14485 you do things based on contexts,
14486 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
14489 \begin_layout Subsection
14492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14494 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14501 \begin_layout Standard
14504 used its own fonts.
14506 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
14507 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14509 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14510 needs some extra information about the fonts,
14511 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
14512 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
14513 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
14514 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14515 files are very portable across different machines.
14517 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
14518 has increased a lot in the meantime;
14519 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
14521 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
14522 \begin_inset space ~
14526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14528 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
14534 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
14535 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
14538 \begin_layout Standard
14539 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
14540 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
14541 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14542 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14544 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
14547 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
14548 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
14551 \begin_layout Standard
14552 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14562 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
14564 or other font deficiencies;
14565 so you might have to experiment.
14573 \begin_layout Subsection
14574 Document Font and Font size
14575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14577 name "subsec:Document-Font"
14582 \begin_inset Index idx
14587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14604 \begin_inset Index idx
14609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14611 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14628 \begin_layout Standard
14629 You can set the document fonts in the
14631 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14635 \begin_inset Index idx
14640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14642 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14661 section of the dialog,
14662 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
14667 \begin_inset space ~
14677 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
14678 \begin_inset space ~
14681 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
14684 \begin_layout Standard
14690 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14691 This requires that you use
14704 as the output format,
14706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14710 \begin_inset space \space{}
14713 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14714 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14715 installed (see section
14716 \begin_inset space ~
14720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14722 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14728 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14730 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14731 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14733 \begin_inset space ~
14738 since \SpecialChar LyX
14739 cannot determine the family.
14740 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
14741 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14744 cannot determine this in advance,
14745 so you might need to experiment.
14748 \begin_layout Standard
14749 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14750 fonts (which is the default),
14751 the possible options for the font include
14755 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14762 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14763 With LyX's automatic font encoding,
14765 depending on the document language,
14766 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14774 \begin_inset space ~
14780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14787 ) or a look-alike of this font:
14789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14806 European Computer Modern
14809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14818 some classes set different default fonts.
14821 \begin_layout Standard
14827 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
14828 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14833 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14836 \begin_inset space ~
14841 version 6 or later,
14842 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
14847 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
14848 you have to use a vector font.
14849 Depending on how your document should look,
14853 \begin_layout Itemize
14857 \begin_inset space ~
14863 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14875 \begin_inset space ~
14880 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14881 community in order to replace
14885 as the default font.
14886 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14887 Except for some details,
14888 where the appearance was improved,
14892 \begin_inset space ~
14905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14906 One difference is improved kerning.
14914 \begin_layout Itemize
14915 If you do not like the look of
14924 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
14926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14930 \begin_inset space ~
14936 \begin_inset space ~
14946 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14947 \begin_inset space ~
14950 serif and typewriter fonts,
14954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14955 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14963 \begin_inset space ~
14972 for sans serif text),
14973 or different shapes of the same font,
14975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14979 \begin_inset space \space{}
14987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14991 \begin_inset space \space{}
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15015 but you can also select your own.
15016 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 The differences between roman,
15023 \begin_inset space ~
15032 fonts are explained in section
15033 \begin_inset space ~
15037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15039 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15051 \begin_inset space ~
15056 was originally designed for newspapers.
15057 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
15061 \begin_inset space ~
15066 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15069 \begin_layout Standard
15070 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15086 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15091 depends on the class you are using.
15092 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15095 \begin_layout Standard
15096 Note that the font size is the
15101 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15102 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
15104 and subscripts) by this value.
15105 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15108 \begin_inset space ~
15114 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15115 \begin_inset space ~
15119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15121 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15129 \begin_layout Standard
15133 \begin_inset space ~
15138 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15143 serif or typewriter.
15148 selection uses what is preset by the class,
15149 the other selections override this.
15160 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15163 \begin_layout Standard
15168 LaTeX font encoding
15170 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15176 \begin_inset Index idx
15181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15184 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15200 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15201 Unless you have specific reasons,
15209 \begin_layout Standard
15213 Use Old Style Figures
15217 Use True Small Caps
15220 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15223 Use Old Style Figures
15226 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
15227 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15235 9) with ascenders and descenders,
15236 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
15239 Use True Small Caps
15241 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
15242 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
15243 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15246 \begin_layout Standard
15249 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
15254 if you use non-TeX fonts),
15260 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15264 \begin_layout Standard
15269 allows users of the languages Chinese,
15271 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15276 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15282 \begin_inset Index idx
15287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15290 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15304 So this has no effect for the document language
15320 \begin_layout Standard
15323 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15325 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15331 \begin_inset Index idx
15336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15339 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15357 \begin_layout Standard
15360 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15362 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15367 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15369 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15375 instead of ligatures (--,
15377 \begin_inset space ~
15381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15383 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
15394 \begin_layout Standard
15395 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
15399 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15408 When you choose a new font or font size,
15414 change the screen font!
15415 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
15416 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
15418 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
15420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
15425 \begin_inset space ~
15429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15431 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
15444 \begin_layout Subsection
15448 \begin_layout Standard
15449 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
15450 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
15451 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
15452 fonts for your document,
15453 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
15455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15459 \begin_inset Index idx
15464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15466 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15481 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
15482 automatically selects a math font.
15483 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
15484 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
15485 's default font family
15486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15492 \begin_inset space ~
15498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15503 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
15506 \begin_layout Standard
15507 Note that the math font will not be used for
15511 (which is inserted with the shortcut
15517 or by the insertion of the command
15524 Also note that some math fonts are sans
15525 \begin_inset space ~
15529 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
15531 \begin_inset space ~
15534 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
15537 \begin_inset space ~
15545 \begin_inset space ~
15550 in the document font settings.
15553 \begin_layout Standard
15554 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
15555 fonts for the document,
15556 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
15557 font (in most cases
15558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset space ~
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
15574 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
15575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15581 \begin_inset space ~
15587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15593 \begin_layout Subsection
15594 Using Different Text Styles
15595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15597 name "subsec:charstyles"
15602 \begin_inset Index idx
15607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15614 \begin_inset Index idx
15619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15628 \begin_layout Standard
15629 As we've already seen,
15631 automatically changes the style for certain paragraph environments.
15633 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
15634 This is where we meet the concept of
15641 \begin_layout Standard
15644 supports two text styles,
15660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15664 available with all document classes.
15666 some document classes and modules provide
15670 for specific purposes.
15671 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
15674 \begin_layout Standard
15677 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15686 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15691 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
15692 you selected it and chose e.
15693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 encourage the use of
15726 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15734 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15740 Rather than fiddling with
15745 they encourage the use of
15750 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15756 \begin_inset Quotes els
15760 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15765 \begin_inset Quotes els
15769 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15773 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15775 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
15776 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15777 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15778 On a more practical level,
15779 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15780 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
15785 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
15786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15792 you would have to change any single occurrence.
15793 With a semantic markup (such as
15799 you'd just need to change the definition of
15804 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15807 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
15808 using different markup semantics.
15811 \begin_layout Standard
15813 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
15817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15818 Builtin Text Styles
15819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15821 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15828 \begin_layout Standard
15829 The two builtin text styles can be activated via the
15838 \begin_layout Standard
15844 do one of the following:
15847 \begin_layout Itemize
15848 click on the toolbar button
15857 \begin_layout Itemize
15858 use the key binding
15867 \begin_layout Itemize
15875 arg "dialog-show character"
15881 arg "dialog-show character"
15891 \begin_layout Standard
15892 This command is a toggle.
15898 style is already active,
15899 they deactivate it.
15902 \begin_layout Standard
15903 One typically uses the
15907 style for proper names.
15910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15917 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
15919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15925 \begin_layout Standard
15931 is producing text in
15936 but the definition can be changed.
15939 \begin_layout Standard
15940 A more widely used text style is the
15945 You can activate (or deactivate —
15946 it's also a toggle) the
15953 \begin_layout Itemize
15954 clicking on the toolbar button
15963 \begin_layout Itemize
15964 using the keybindings
15973 \begin_layout Itemize
15981 arg "dialog-show character"
15987 arg "dialog-show character"
15997 \begin_layout Standard
16002 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16003 packages use a different font,
16004 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16008 \begin_layout Standard
16009 We've been using the
16013 style all over the place in this document.
16014 Here's one more example:
16017 \begin_layout Quotation
16020 Do not overuse text styles!
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16025 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16026 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
16027 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse text styles.
16030 \begin_layout Standard
16031 In contrast to the custom text styles,
16032 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
16037 You can therefore always reset to the default font using the key binding
16048 arg "dialog-show character"
16056 arg "dialog-show character"
16062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16066 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16073 \begin_layout Standard
16074 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
16075 a module (see section
16076 \begin_inset space ~
16080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16082 reference "subsec:Modules"
16091 or local layout settings (see section
16092 \begin_inset space ~
16096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16098 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16104 As the two builtin styles,
16109 markup for specific functions.
16116 module that provides,
16117 among other things,
16118 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
16130 \begin_inset Quotes els
16134 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16141 These styles can be found,
16145 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16151 \begin_layout Standard
16152 For the purpose of demonstration,
16153 we have loaded in this document the optional module
16157 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
16158 By example of the emphasized style,
16159 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
16164 appears as normal font change,
16165 the custom text style
16166 \begin_inset Flex Emph
16169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16175 appears as an inset,
16176 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
16177 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
16179 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
16181 \begin_inset Flex Code
16184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16192 \begin_inset Flex Strong
16195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16203 \begin_inset Flex Noun
16206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16213 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
16216 \begin_layout Subsection
16217 Tweaking Text with the
16222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16224 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16229 \begin_inset Index idx
16234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16243 \begin_layout Standard
16244 There are always occasions when you will need to do some formal fine-tuning;
16245 so \SpecialChar LyX
16246 gives you a way to customize the properties of text passages.
16248 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
16250 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
16253 \begin_layout Standard
16254 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
16256 generally the better way of handling such issues),
16257 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
16262 comes in as a last resort.
16265 \begin_layout Standard
16266 Before we document how to tweak the text properties,
16267 we want to issue a warning yet again:
16268 Don't overuse that!
16270 \begin_inset Newline newline
16273 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
16276 \begin_layout Standard
16277 To tweak text properties,
16281 arg "dialog-show character"
16284 dialog or press the toolbar button
16287 arg "dialog-show character"
16291 There are several combo boxes in this dialog,
16292 each corresponding to a different text property that you can choose.
16293 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
16297 \begin_inset space ~
16303 which keeps the current state of that property.
16308 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
16309 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
16312 \begin_layout Standard
16318 and their options (in addition to
16321 \begin_inset space ~
16333 \begin_layout Labeling
16334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16348 The possible options are:
16352 \begin_layout Labeling
16353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16358 This is the Roman font family.
16359 Normally a serif font.
16360 It's also the default family.
16370 \begin_layout Labeling
16371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16375 \begin_inset space ~
16382 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16394 \begin_layout Labeling
16395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16402 This is the Typewriter font family.
16408 arg "font-typewriter"
16416 \begin_layout Standard
16417 The general differences of these families are:
16420 \begin_layout Itemize
16425 fonts use characters with serifs.
16426 These are the small
16427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16434 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16435 The following example shows the difference:
16436 \begin_inset Newline newline
16440 \begin_inset Newline newline
16445 text without serifs
16448 \begin_inset Newline newline
16451 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16452 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16459 \begin_layout Itemize
16464 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16465 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16466 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16469 \begin_layout Itemize
16475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16483 which means every character has the same width;
16485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16502 \begin_inset Newline newline
16506 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16520 \begin_inset Note Note
16523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16524 For more on phantoms see section
16525 \begin_inset space ~
16529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16531 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16542 \begin_inset Newline newline
16549 \begin_layout Labeling
16550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16555 This corresponds to the print weight.
16560 \begin_layout Labeling
16561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16566 This is the Medium font series.
16567 It's also the default series.
16570 \begin_layout Labeling
16571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16578 This is the Bold font series.
16591 \begin_layout Labeling
16592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16597 As the name implies.
16602 \begin_layout Labeling
16603 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16608 This is the Upright font shape.
16609 It's also the default shape.
16612 \begin_layout Labeling
16613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16624 is the Italic font shape
16630 \begin_layout Labeling
16631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16638 This is the Slanted font shape
16640 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
16642 this is different from italic).
16645 \begin_layout Labeling
16646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16657 This is the Small caps font shape
16664 \begin_layout Labeling
16665 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16670 Alters the size of the font.
16671 You won't find numerical values here;
16672 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
16674 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16676 but a general description of what you want to do.
16681 \begin_layout Labeling
16682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16703 arg "font-size tiny"
16709 \begin_layout Labeling
16710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16731 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16737 \begin_layout Labeling
16738 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16759 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16765 \begin_layout Labeling
16766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16787 arg "font-size small"
16793 \begin_layout Labeling
16794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16808 It's also the default size.
16812 arg "font-size normal"
16818 \begin_layout Labeling
16819 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16840 arg "font-size large"
16846 \begin_layout Labeling
16847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16868 arg "font-size larger"
16874 \begin_layout Labeling
16875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16896 arg "font-size largest"
16902 \begin_layout Labeling
16903 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16924 arg "font-size huge"
16930 \begin_layout Labeling
16931 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16952 arg "font-size giant"
16958 \begin_layout Labeling
16959 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16964 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
16966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16985 arg "font-size increase"
16991 \begin_layout Labeling
16992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16997 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
16999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17018 arg "font-size decrease"
17024 \begin_layout Standard
17030 don't go crazy with this feature.
17031 You should almost never need to change the font size.
17033 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
17035 This is here for fine-tuning only!
17039 \begin_layout Standard
17040 Another combo box allows to tweak
17047 \begin_layout Labeling
17048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17053 Alters the text color.
17054 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
17060 which means that the document default color set in
17062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17063 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17069 \begin_inset space ~
17169 \begin_inset Index idx
17174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17176 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17193 \begin_layout Labeling
17194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17199 Here you can have text passages being underlined.
17200 Avoid using underlining if you can!
17201 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
17202 when you could not change fonts.
17203 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17204 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17205 because some people
17209 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17214 \begin_layout Labeling
17215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17220 Don't use underlining.
17223 \begin_layout Labeling
17224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17231 This is text with Single underlining on.
17237 arg "font-underline"
17243 \begin_inset Newline newline
17249 \begin_layout Labeling
17250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17257 This is text with Double underlining on.
17263 arg "font-underunderline"
17269 \begin_layout Labeling
17270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17277 This is text with Wavy underlining on.
17283 arg "font-underwave"
17287 \begin_inset Newline newline
17290 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
17291 Keep antinausea pills handy.
17295 \begin_layout Labeling
17296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17301 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
17305 \begin_layout Labeling
17306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17311 Don't use strikethrough.
17314 \begin_layout Labeling
17315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17322 This is text with Single strikethrough on.
17328 arg "font-strikeout"
17332 \begin_inset Newline newline
17335 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
17338 \begin_layout Labeling
17339 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17343 \begin_inset space ~
17350 This is text with /-strikethrough on.
17353 \begin_inset Newline newline
17356 This is used to make text hardly readable.
17360 \begin_layout Standard
17361 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17364 \begin_layout Labeling
17365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17370 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
17371 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17372 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
17373 \begin_inset Newline newline
17376 If you have for example,
17377 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17379 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17380 When using the spell checking (see section
17381 \begin_inset space ~
17385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17387 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17392 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17393 \begin_inset Newline newline
17396 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
17399 Exclude from Spellchecking
17402 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17405 \begin_layout Standard
17406 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
17407 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17408 \begin_inset space ~
17412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17414 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17426 \begin_layout Itemize
17434 This is text with emphasize on
17439 \begin_layout Itemize
17447 This is text with Noun on.
17450 \begin_layout Standard
17451 So you have a huge number of combinations to select from.
17452 Once you have applied a text property via the
17455 arg "dialog-show character"
17461 arg "dialog-show character"
17465 the settings are temporarily saved.
17466 You can activate the last applied properties by using the toolbar button
17469 arg "textstyle-apply"
17473 The button lets you apply those even when the dialog isn't visible.
17474 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
17475 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17476 20) most recently applied settings,
17477 from which you can select one.
17480 \begin_layout Standard
17481 To completely reset the text properties of a selection to the default,
17492 from the menu of the toolbar button
17495 arg "textstyle-apply"
17502 \begin_layout Standard
17503 We conclude this section with the same warning once again:
17504 Do not overuse the fonts!
17506 more often than not,
17507 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17510 \begin_layout Section
17511 Printing and Previewing
17514 \begin_layout Subsection
17518 \begin_layout Standard
17519 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
17521 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17522 Before we tell you that,
17523 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
17524 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17526 Additional Features
17531 \begin_layout Standard
17533 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17536 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17537 typesetting system,
17538 but to prevent confusion,
17539 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17542 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17545 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17546 to turn your writing into printable output.
17547 This happens in two stages:
17550 \begin_layout Enumerate
17553 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17555 generating a file with the extension,
17557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17571 \begin_layout Enumerate
17574 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17575 to use the commands in the
17579 file to produce printable output.
17582 \begin_layout Subsection
17583 Output file formats
17584 \begin_inset Index idx
17589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17598 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17607 \begin_inset Index idx
17612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17631 \begin_layout Standard
17632 This file type has the extension
17633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17645 It contains your document as plain text in UTF-8 encoding.
17648 \begin_layout Standard
17649 You can export your document to plain text with the menu
17651 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17652 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17654 \begin_inset space ~
17661 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17662 bibliography (section
17663 \begin_inset space ~
17667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17669 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17675 If your document includes such material,
17678 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17679 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17681 \begin_inset space ~
17685 \begin_inset space ~
17689 \begin_inset space ~
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17701 \begin_inset space ~
17707 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to plain text.
17710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17713 \begin_inset Index idx
17718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17720 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17738 \begin_layout Standard
17739 This file type has the extension
17740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17751 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17752 program to process your document.
17753 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17755 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17756 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
17757 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17758 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17759 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
17762 \begin_layout Standard
17763 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17764 -file using the menu
17766 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17767 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17771 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17772 export variants are explained in section
17773 \begin_inset space ~
17777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17779 reference "subsec:Export"
17787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17789 \begin_inset Index idx
17794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17796 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17813 \begin_layout Standard
17814 This file type has the extension
17815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17836 because it is completely portable;
17837 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17838 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17842 \begin_layout Standard
17843 DVI files do not contain images,
17844 they only link to them.
17845 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17846 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
17847 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
17848 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17851 \begin_layout Standard
17852 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17854 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17855 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17860 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17861 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 \begin_inset space ~
17869 The latter option uses the program
17871 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17877 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17880 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17881 \begin_inset space ~
17885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17887 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17893 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17894 is still a work in progress,
17895 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
17899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17901 \begin_inset Index idx
17906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17908 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17925 \begin_layout Standard
17926 This file type has the extension
17927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17939 PostScript was developed by the company
17943 as a printer language.
17944 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
17945 PostScript can be seen as a
17946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17949 programming language
17950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17954 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17959 If you are interested in learning more about this,
17960 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17966 \begin_inset Index idx
17971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17993 As a result of this,
17994 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17997 \begin_layout Standard
17998 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18002 Encapsulated PostScript
18003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18020 As \SpecialChar LyX
18021 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
18022 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
18026 \begin_inset space ~
18029 images in your document,
18032 \begin_inset space ~
18035 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18036 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18038 So if you plan to use PostScript,
18039 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
18042 \begin_layout Standard
18043 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18045 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18046 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18054 \begin_inset Index idx
18059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18076 \begin_inset Index idx
18081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18090 \begin_layout Standard
18091 This file type has the extension
18092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18108 Portable Document Format
18109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18116 was derived from PostScript.
18117 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18127 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
18130 \begin_layout Standard
18131 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18135 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18168 Portable Network Graphics
18169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18186 You can also use any other image format,
18187 because \SpecialChar LyX
18188 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
18189 But as described in the section about PostScript,
18190 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
18191 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18194 \begin_layout Standard
18195 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18197 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18203 \begin_layout Description
18205 \begin_inset space ~
18208 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18212 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18215 \begin_layout Description
18217 \begin_inset space ~
18224 ) This uses the program
18226 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18229 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18232 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18241 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18242 \begin_inset space ~
18246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18248 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18254 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18255 is still a work in progress,
18256 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
18260 \begin_layout Description
18262 \begin_inset space ~
18269 ) This uses the program
18274 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18280 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18281 \begin_inset space ~
18285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18287 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18293 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
18295 vertically written Japanese.
18298 \begin_layout Description
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18303 (cropped) This is the same as
18306 \begin_inset space ~
18311 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18312 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18313 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18316 \begin_layout Description
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18321 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18325 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
18328 \begin_layout Description
18330 \begin_inset space ~
18333 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18337 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18338 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18342 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18343 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18346 \begin_layout Standard
18350 \begin_inset space ~
18359 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
18362 and works without problems.
18363 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18364 or specific OpenType fonts,
18365 you might want to try out
18368 \begin_inset space ~
18376 \begin_inset space ~
18382 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
18389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18391 \begin_inset Index idx
18396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18413 \begin_inset Index idx
18418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18427 \begin_layout Standard
18428 This file type has the extension
18429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18441 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18442 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18443 When \SpecialChar LyX
18445 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
18446 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18452 between different formats,
18453 which are described in section
18455 Math Output in XHTML
18460 \begin_inset space ~
18468 \begin_layout Standard
18469 XHTML output remains
18470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18478 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18479 features are supported yet.
18483 and the World Wide Web
18488 Additional Features
18491 for more information.
18494 \begin_layout Standard
18495 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18497 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18498 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18504 \begin_layout Subsection
18506 \begin_inset Index idx
18511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18513 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18530 \begin_layout Standard
18531 To get a look at the final version of your document,
18532 with all of the page breaks in place,
18533 the footnotes correctly numbered,
18543 or use the toolbar button
18550 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
18551 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18552 \begin_inset space ~
18556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18558 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18563 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
18564 \begin_inset space ~
18568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18570 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18576 Further output formats can be selected via
18578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18579 View (Other Formats)
18581 or the toolbar button
18590 \begin_layout Standard
18591 If you have changed your document,
18592 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
18594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18600 Update (Other Formats)
18606 \begin_layout Standard
18607 When you preview a file,
18608 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18609 's temporary directory.
18610 To have a real output,
18611 export your document.
18614 \begin_layout Section
18615 A few Words about Typography
18616 \begin_inset Index idx
18621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18630 \begin_layout Subsection
18632 Dashes and Minus Signs
18633 \begin_inset Index idx
18638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18645 \begin_inset Index idx
18650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18659 \begin_layout Standard
18660 In \SpecialChar LyX
18663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18674 symbol comes in four variants:
18695 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18701 \begin_layout Standard
18702 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18712 height_special "totalheight"
18717 backgroundcolor "none"
18720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18721 \begin_inset Tabular
18722 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18723 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18724 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18725 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18726 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18727 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18728 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18756 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18796 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18819 system key combination
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 the en dash is entered with
18828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18837 and the em dash with
18840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18853 is the Mac label for the right
18863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18876 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18877 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 system key combination or
18901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18967 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18973 \begin_layout Standard
18974 Dashes can also be inserted with
18976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18978 \begin_inset space ~
18981 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18989 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
18992 \begin_layout Standard
18993 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
18994 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
18995 Here are some examples:
18998 \begin_layout Enumerate
18999 line- and page-breaks
19000 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19010 \begin_layout Enumerate
19013 \begin_inset space ~
19017 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19027 \begin_layout Enumerate
19028 The em dash is used without spaces:
19031 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19041 \begin_layout Enumerate
19042 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
19046 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19056 \begin_layout Standard
19058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19060 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
19061 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
19069 \begin_layout Subsection
19070 Dashes and Line Breaks
19071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19073 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19080 \begin_layout Standard
19081 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
19083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19089 \begin_layout Itemize
19091 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
19092 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19095 \begin_layout Itemize
19097 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
19100 \begin_layout Itemize
19101 In French and Spanish,
19102 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
19103 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19108 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19109 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19120 allows line breaks after hyphens and these en-dashes and em-dashes.
19123 \begin_layout Enumerate
19124 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19125 \begin_inset space ~
19128 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19130 The Elements of Typographic Style
19133 \begin_inset space ~
19136 – can be prevented using non-breaking spaces.
19139 \begin_layout Enumerate
19140 Unwanted line breaks
19144 dashes must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19151 Prevent Hyphenation
19156 \begin_inset space ~
19172 in \SpecialChar TeX
19174 a non-breaking space does not suffice.
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
19181 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
19190 \begin_layout Itemize
19192 \begin_inset space ~
19196 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19206 height_special "totalheight"
19211 backgroundcolor "none"
19214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19223 \begin_layout Itemize
19225 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19235 height_special "totalheight"
19240 backgroundcolor "none"
19243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19245 \begin_inset space ~
19253 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19254 \begin_inset space ~
19257 – sont très utiles.
19260 \begin_layout Itemize
19265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 un inciso con rayas—
19280 \begin_layout Standard
19281 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19282 \begin_inset space ~
19285 – in contrast to an overfull line
19286 \begin_inset space ~
19289 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19293 \begin_layout Standard
19294 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
19295 you can select the option
19297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19298 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19299 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19300 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19305 \begin_layout Enumerate
19306 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19307 They can be prevented using non-breaking spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
19313 \begin_layout Itemize
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19318 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19319 \begin_inset space ~
19322 – sont très utiles.
19326 \begin_layout Enumerate
19327 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19328 \begin_inset Newline newline
19333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19334 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19336 \begin_inset space ~
19340 \begin_inset space ~
19349 \begin_layout Itemize
19350 Em-dashes without spaces—
19351 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19352 common in American English—
19353 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19354 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
19357 \begin_layout Standard
19358 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19359 \begin_inset space ~
19363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19365 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19377 \begin_layout Enumerate
19380 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
19381 \begin_inset space ~
19385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19387 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19399 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19402 \begin_layout Standard
19403 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19409 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19418 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19426 \begin_layout Standard
19427 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19429 \begin_inset space ~
19433 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19434 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
19436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19443 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
19448 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 The behavior was changed since
19458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19476 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
19477 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19485 \begin_layout Standard
19488 \begin_inset space ~
19496 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19498 \begin_inset space ~
19501 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19504 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19505 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19506 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19507 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19509 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19514 If you used both literal and
19515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19522 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19531 \begin_layout Subsection
19533 \begin_inset Index idx
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19547 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19554 \begin_layout Standard
19555 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19556 but automatically in the output.
19557 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19563 \begin_inset Index idx
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19571 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 following the rules of the document language.
19587 does not hyphenate text in the
19591 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19594 \begin_layout Standard
19596 hyphenates almost perfectly;
19597 it only has problems with text in the
19601 font and with unusual constructs,
19603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19611 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19612 cannot break a word correctly,
19613 you can set hyphenation points manually.
19614 This is done with the menu
19616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19617 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19619 \begin_inset space ~
19625 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
19626 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
19629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19636 that are common in word processors,
19637 these added hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19639 If no hyphenation is necessary or the automatic hyphenation is disabled,
19644 \begin_layout Standard
19645 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
19646 does not hyphenate correctly,
19647 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
19648 how to hyphenate it by adding the command
19649 \begin_inset Flex Code
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19660 to the preamble which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen,
19662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19667 \begin_inset Flex Code
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion dis-quo-ta-tions}
19678 You can also use this to prevent hyphenation of a word,
19680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19685 \begin_inset Flex Code
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 hyphenation{unbroken}
19697 If there are a lot of these hyphenation exceptions,
19698 you can collect them in a single file (say,
19700 \begin_inset Flex Code
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 ) and then import the file via:
19711 \begin_inset Flex Code
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 usepackage{myhyphens}
19723 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
19724 can find it (see the section
19726 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
19736 \begin_layout Standard
19738 \begin_inset Flex Code
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19749 applies to the language that is current when the command is issued (in the preamble,
19750 this is usually the main language of the document).
19751 If you want to define patterns for specific languages without knowing which language is in effect,
19752 the language packages
19760 provide specific variants of the command:
19763 \begin_layout Itemize
19770 \begin_inset Flex Code
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
19787 \begin_layout Itemize
19794 \begin_inset Flex Code
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
19808 \begin_layout Standard
19810 depending on which language package you are using:
19813 \begin_layout Itemize
19814 \begin_inset Flex Code
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19820 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
19821 \begin_inset Newline newline
19824 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
19832 \begin_layout Itemize
19833 \begin_inset Flex Code
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
19847 \begin_layout Standard
19848 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
19852 \begin_layout Itemize
19853 \begin_inset Flex Code
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
19867 \begin_layout Itemize
19868 \begin_inset Flex Code
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
19882 \begin_layout Standard
19883 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
19886 \begin_layout Standard
19887 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
19888 which is usually after the user preamble.
19889 So it is advised that you embrace them in
19890 \begin_inset Flex Code
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
19903 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19907 \begin_layout Standard
19908 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19909 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
19910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19919 would then see the hyphen
19920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19927 as a line break possibility.
19928 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19929 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
19930 you can use a non-breaking hyphen (
19932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19933 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
19934 Non-Breaking Hyphen
19936 ) or put it into a makebox as described in the section
19938 Prevent Hyphenation
19943 \begin_inset space ~
19951 \begin_layout Subsection
19953 \begin_inset Index idx
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19968 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19971 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19978 \begin_layout Standard
19979 When \SpecialChar LyX
19980 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19981 to generate the final version of your document,
19983 automatically distinguishes between words,
19988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19991 appropriate amount of space.
19992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19995 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
19996 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
19999 \begin_layout Standard
20001 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
20003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20014 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
20015 it's the end of a sentence;
20016 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
20017 it's an abbreviation.
20020 \begin_layout Standard
20021 Here are some examples of
20025 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
20028 \begin_layout Itemize
20033 \begin_layout Itemize
20038 \begin_layout Standard
20039 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
20042 \begin_layout Itemize
20044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20048 this is too much space!
20051 \begin_layout Itemize
20056 \begin_layout Standard
20057 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
20060 \begin_layout Standard
20061 To fix this problem,
20062 use one of the following:
20065 \begin_layout Enumerate
20069 \begin_inset space ~
20074 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
20075 \begin_inset space ~
20079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20081 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
20087 \begin_inset Index idx
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 \begin_layout Enumerate
20115 \begin_inset space ~
20120 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
20121 \begin_inset space ~
20125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20127 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
20133 \begin_inset Index idx
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 \begin_layout Enumerate
20161 \begin_inset space ~
20165 \begin_inset space ~
20169 \begin_inset space ~
20176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20178 \begin_inset space ~
20183 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
20184 This function is also bound to
20187 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
20193 \begin_layout Standard
20194 With the corrections,
20195 our earlier examples look like this:
20198 \begin_layout Itemize
20200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20204 \begin_inset space \space{}
20207 this is too much space!
20210 \begin_layout Itemize
20211 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
20215 \begin_layout Standard
20216 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
20217 If your language is such a language,
20218 you don't need to worry,
20219 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
20220 will take care of this.
20223 \begin_layout Standard
20224 For those that do need to bother,
20225 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
20229 \begin_inset space ~
20235 feature described in the section
20237 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
20242 Additional Features
20247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20249 \begin_inset Index idx
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 \begin_inset Index idx
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 \begin_layout Standard
20297 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
20299 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
20300 and use a closing mark at the end.
20303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20311 The keyboard character,
20317 generates this automatically.
20320 \begin_layout Standard
20321 You can specify what character the
20325 key produces by using the submenu
20331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20335 \begin_inset Index idx
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 dialog and switching the
20360 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
20361 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
20363 \begin_inset space ~
20369 \begin_layout Labeling
20370 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20382 \begin_inset space ~
20386 \begin_inset space ~
20390 \begin_inset Quotes els
20394 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20408 \begin_inset Quotes els
20412 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20415 quotation marks (as common,
20417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20424 \begin_layout Labeling
20425 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20428 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20432 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20436 \begin_inset space ~
20440 \begin_inset space ~
20444 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20448 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20454 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20458 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20462 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20466 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20469 quotation marks (as common,
20471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20478 \begin_layout Labeling
20479 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20482 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20486 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20490 \begin_inset space ~
20494 \begin_inset space ~
20498 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20502 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20508 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20512 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20516 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20520 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20523 quotation marks (as common,
20525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20532 \begin_layout Labeling
20533 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20536 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20540 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20544 \begin_inset space ~
20548 \begin_inset space ~
20552 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20556 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20562 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20566 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20570 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20574 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20577 quotation marks (as common,
20579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20586 \begin_layout Labeling
20587 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20590 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20594 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20598 \begin_inset space ~
20602 \begin_inset space ~
20606 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20610 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20616 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20620 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20624 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20628 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20631 quotation marks (as common,
20633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20640 \begin_layout Labeling
20641 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20644 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20648 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20652 \begin_inset space ~
20656 \begin_inset space ~
20660 \begin_inset Quotes als
20664 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20670 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20674 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20678 \begin_inset Quotes als
20682 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20685 quotation marks (as common,
20687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20694 \begin_layout Labeling
20695 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20698 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20702 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20706 \begin_inset space ~
20710 \begin_inset space ~
20714 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20718 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20724 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20728 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20732 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20736 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20739 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20742 \begin_layout Labeling
20743 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20746 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20750 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20754 \begin_inset space ~
20758 \begin_inset space ~
20762 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20766 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20772 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20776 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20780 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20784 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20787 quotation marks (as common,
20789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20796 \begin_layout Labeling
20797 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20800 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20804 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20808 \begin_inset space ~
20812 \begin_inset space ~
20816 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20820 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20826 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20830 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20834 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20838 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20841 quotation marks (as common,
20843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20850 \begin_layout Labeling
20851 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20854 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20858 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20862 \begin_inset space ~
20866 \begin_inset space ~
20870 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20874 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20880 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20884 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20888 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20892 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20895 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20901 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20902 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
20910 \begin_layout Labeling
20911 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20914 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20918 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20922 \begin_inset space ~
20926 \begin_inset space ~
20930 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20934 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20940 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20944 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20948 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20952 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20955 quotation marks (as common,
20957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20964 \begin_layout Labeling
20965 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20968 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20972 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20976 \begin_inset space ~
20980 \begin_inset space ~
20984 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20988 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20994 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20998 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
21002 \begin_inset Quotes wls
21006 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
21009 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
21012 \begin_layout Labeling
21013 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21016 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21020 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21024 \begin_inset space ~
21028 \begin_inset space ~
21032 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21036 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21044 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21052 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21060 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21068 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21073 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
21076 \begin_layout Labeling
21077 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21078 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21086 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21092 \begin_inset space ~
21096 \begin_inset space ~
21102 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21110 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21114 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21118 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21122 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21126 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21129 quotation marks (as common,
21131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21142 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
21146 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21154 \begin_layout Labeling
21155 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21156 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21164 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21170 \begin_inset space ~
21174 \begin_inset space ~
21180 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21188 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21192 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21196 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21200 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21204 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21207 quotation marks (as common,
21209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21213 in North Korea and China)
21214 \begin_inset script superscript
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21219 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
21235 \begin_layout Labeling
21236 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21239 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21243 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21247 \begin_inset space ~
21251 \begin_inset space ~
21255 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21259 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21265 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21271 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21277 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21283 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21288 quotation marks (as common in Israel)
21291 \begin_layout Standard
21292 Inner quotation marks
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 In many writing cultures,
21298 these are single quotation marks.
21299 But as the British and French styles show,
21300 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
21301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21308 does not necessarily mean
21309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21317 This is why we call them
21318 \begin_inset Quotes els
21322 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21338 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
21340 \begin_inset Quotes els
21344 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21347 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
21350 arg "quote-insert inner"
21355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21361 \begin_layout Standard
21363 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
21365 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
21366 even if the document-wide style changes.
21367 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
21368 If you check the setting
21370 Use dynamic quotation marks
21374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21380 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
21381 they appear in a special color).
21382 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
21383 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
21384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21388 if your publisher requests a different style).
21391 \begin_layout Standard
21392 Individual quotation marks (i.
21393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21397 their level [inner,
21401 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
21404 \begin_layout Subsection
21406 \begin_inset Index idx
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 \begin_inset Index idx
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21435 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21452 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21459 \begin_layout Standard
21460 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
21461 These groups are known as
21466 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21467 knows about ligatures,
21468 your documents will contain them too in the output.
21469 Here are the standard ligatures:
21472 \begin_layout Itemize
21476 \begin_layout Itemize
21480 \begin_layout Itemize
21484 \begin_layout Itemize
21488 \begin_layout Itemize
21492 \begin_layout Standard
21493 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21496 \begin_layout Standard
21498 you don't want a ligature in a word.
21499 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21508 it looks really weird in compound words,
21510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21525 To break a ligature,
21528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21529 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21531 \begin_inset space ~
21538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21549 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21566 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21574 \begin_layout Subsection
21576 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21578 \begin_inset Index idx
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 \begin_layout Standard
21606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21607 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21612 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21615 \begin_layout Description
21617 The name of the game.
21620 \begin_layout Description
21622 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21626 \begin_layout Description
21628 The \SpecialChar TeX
21629 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21633 \begin_layout Description
21634 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21635 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21639 \begin_layout Standard
21640 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21646 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21654 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21655 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21656 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21657 converges to the number
21658 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21662 The actual version is
21663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21672 the previous one was
21673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21684 \begin_layout Subsection
21686 \begin_inset Index idx
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 \begin_layout Standard
21711 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
21712 As you can see in the example below,
21713 it looks better when the space is smaller.
21715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21722 for units use the menu
21724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21725 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21727 \begin_inset space ~
21735 arg "space-insert thin"
21741 \begin_layout Standard
21742 Here is an example to show the differences:
21745 \begin_layout Standard
21746 \begin_inset Tabular
21747 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21748 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21749 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21750 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21757 \begin_inset space ~
21761 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 space between number and unit
21780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21789 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 half space between number and unit
21814 \begin_layout Subsection
21816 \begin_inset Index idx
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21823 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 \begin_layout Standard
21841 In the early days of word processors,
21842 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
21843 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21844 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
21845 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
21846 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21847 These bits of text became known as
21858 \begin_layout Standard
21861 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21862 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21863 But what about widows and orphans,
21864 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
21865 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21866 governing page breaks,
21867 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
21868 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
21869 you can add the commands
21870 \begin_inset Newline newline
21878 \begin_inset Newline newline
21886 \begin_inset Newline newline
21889 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21890 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21891 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21893 \begin_inset space ~
21897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21899 key "latexcompanion"
21905 \begin_inset space ~
21909 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21916 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21917 's page break mechanism.
21920 \begin_layout Chapter
21924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21926 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21933 \begin_layout Standard
21934 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21937 \begin_inset space ~
21943 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21946 \begin_layout Section
21948 \begin_inset Index idx
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21969 \begin_layout Standard
21971 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21974 \begin_layout Description
21977 \begin_inset space ~
21980 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21981 \begin_inset Newline newline
21985 \begin_inset Note Note
21988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21997 \begin_layout Description
21998 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21999 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
22002 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
22003 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
22005 \begin_inset space ~
22011 \begin_inset Newline newline
22015 \begin_inset Note Comment
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
22028 \begin_layout Description
22030 \begin_inset space ~
22033 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
22035 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
22037 \begin_inset space ~
22043 \begin_inset Newline newline
22047 \begin_inset Newline newline
22051 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22060 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
22061 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
22066 of a comment that appears in the output.
22072 \begin_inset Newline newline
22076 \begin_inset Newline newline
22079 As you can see in the example,
22080 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
22083 \begin_layout Standard
22084 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
22092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22096 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
22099 \begin_layout Section
22101 \begin_inset Index idx
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22115 name "sec:Footnotes"
22122 \begin_layout Standard
22124 uses boxes to display footnotes:
22125 When you insert a footnote using the menu
22127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22130 or the toolbar button
22133 arg "footnote-insert"
22147 \begin_inset Graphics
22148 filename clipart/footnote.png
22157 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22158 's representation of your footnote.
22168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22192 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
22193 Clicking on the box label again will close
22206 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
22207 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
22222 \begin_layout Standard
22223 Here is an example footnote:
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 To close a footnote,
22233 click on the footnote box label.
22241 \begin_layout Standard
22242 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
22243 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
22244 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
22245 according to the document class.
22247 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
22248 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22254 ey are described in the
22257 \begin_inset space ~
22265 \begin_layout Section
22267 \begin_inset Index idx
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22281 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
22288 \begin_layout Standard
22289 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
22291 When you insert a margin note via the menu
22293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22295 \begin_inset space ~
22300 or the toolbar button
22303 arg "marginalnote-insert"
22323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22330 appearing within your text.
22331 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22332 's representation of your margin
22341 \begin_layout Standard
22342 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
22346 \begin_inset Marginal
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 This is a marginal note.
22359 \begin_layout Standard
22360 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
22361 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
22362 right on odd pages.
22365 \begin_layout Standard
22366 For further information about marginal notes see the section
22369 \begin_inset space ~
22377 \begin_inset space ~
22385 \begin_layout Section
22386 Graphics and Images
22387 \begin_inset Index idx
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 \begin_inset Index idx
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22413 name "sec:Graphics"
22420 \begin_layout Standard
22421 To insert an image in your document,
22422 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
22425 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22434 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
22437 \begin_layout Standard
22438 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
22443 tab allows you to choose your image file.
22444 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
22445 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
22446 \begin_inset space ~
22450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22452 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
22460 \begin_layout Standard
22465 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
22466 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
22469 \begin_inset space ~
22473 \begin_inset space ~
22482 \begin_inset space ~
22486 \begin_inset space ~
22490 \begin_inset space ~
22495 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22496 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
22503 \begin_layout Standard
22507 \begin_inset space ~
22511 \begin_inset space ~
22516 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22517 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22519 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22524 \begin_inset space ~
22529 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
22530 only a frame with the image size is printed.
22533 \begin_layout Standard
22534 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22535 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
22536 This is an example image within a separate,
22537 horizontally centered paragraph:
22540 \begin_layout Standard
22542 \begin_inset Graphics
22543 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22551 \begin_layout Standard
22552 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
22553 you have to put the image into a float,
22555 \begin_inset space ~
22559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22561 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22569 \begin_layout Subsection
22571 \begin_inset Index idx
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22578 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22595 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22602 \begin_layout Standard
22603 You can insert images in any known file format.
22604 But as we explained in section
22605 \begin_inset space ~
22609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22611 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22617 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22619 therefore uses the program
22623 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22624 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22625 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22626 \begin_inset space ~
22630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22632 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22640 \begin_layout Standard
22641 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22644 \begin_layout Description
22646 \begin_inset space ~
22649 images consist of pixel values,
22650 often in a compressed form.
22651 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22652 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22656 Graphics Interchange Format
22657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22674 \begin_inset Index idx
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22700 Portable Network Graphics
22701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22718 \begin_inset Index idx
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22744 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22774 \begin_inset Index idx
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 \begin_layout Description
22800 \begin_inset space ~
22803 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
22804 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
22805 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22806 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22807 \begin_inset Newline newline
22810 Scalable image formats can be
22811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22814 Scalable Vector Graphics
22815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22832 \begin_inset Index idx
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22839 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22858 Encapsulated PostScript
22859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22876 \begin_inset Index idx
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22902 Portable Document Format
22903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22920 \begin_inset Index idx
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22941 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
22942 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22947 In the case of PDF,
22948 the original image is additionally compressed.
22956 \begin_layout Standard
22957 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
22965 \begin_layout Subsection
22966 Grouping of Image Settings
22967 \begin_inset Index idx
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 \begin_layout Standard
22992 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
22993 Images within such a group share their settings,
22994 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
22995 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
22998 \begin_layout Standard
22999 A new group can be set by pressing the button
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23006 \begin_inset space ~
23018 \begin_inset space ~
23022 \begin_inset space ~
23028 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
23031 \begin_layout Section
23033 \begin_inset Index idx
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23054 \begin_layout Standard
23055 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
23058 arg "tabular-insert"
23063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23067 A dialog will appear,
23068 asking you for the number of rows and columns,
23069 and you can select a specific (border) style.
23070 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
23071 This separation appears due to a double line:
23072 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
23073 Here is an example table:
23076 \begin_layout Standard
23078 \begin_inset Tabular
23079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
23080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23280 \begin_layout Standard
23281 This corresponds to the
23282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23289 table style listed in the style selection.
23292 \begin_layout Standard
23293 Other available styles include:
23296 \begin_layout Itemize
23298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23305 which looks line the above table,
23306 but without the first row being separated via double line,
23309 \begin_layout Itemize
23310 a border-less table with no lines at all,
23313 \begin_layout Itemize
23315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23322 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
23332 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
23335 \begin_layout Standard
23336 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
23338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23339 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23343 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
23344 you should alter this setting.
23347 \begin_layout Subsection
23351 \begin_layout Standard
23352 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
23354 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
23358 This brings up the table dialog.
23359 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
23360 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
23361 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
23362 This means that if you select more cells,
23363 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
23366 \begin_layout Standard
23367 In addition to the table dialog,
23371 \begin_inset space ~
23376 helps you in setting table properties.
23377 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
23380 \begin_layout Standard
23384 \begin_inset space ~
23389 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
23390 If you add a row or column,
23391 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
23392 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
23393 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
23395 \begin_inset space ~
23399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23401 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
23409 \begin_layout Standard
23410 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
23419 This will merge the cells to
23424 spread over more than one column/row.
23425 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
23426 so that the alignment,
23428 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
23429 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
23432 \begin_layout Standard
23434 \begin_inset Tabular
23435 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
23436 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
23437 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23438 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
23439 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23440 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 \begin_layout Standard
23572 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23573 -arguments for the table.
23574 They are necessary for special table formatting,
23575 such as the multirow cells,
23576 explained in the chapter
23583 \begin_inset space ~
23589 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23590 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23591 but are visible in the output.
23594 \begin_layout Standard
23595 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23604 Most DVI-viewers are
23608 able to display rotations.
23616 \begin_layout Standard
23621 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23626 adds lines for all cell borders.
23629 \begin_layout Subsection
23631 \begin_inset Index idx
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 \begin_inset Index idx
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 \begin_layout Standard
23668 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
23669 you can use the option
23672 \begin_inset space ~
23676 \begin_inset space ~
23684 \begin_inset space ~
23689 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23690 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23693 \begin_layout Description
23699 The current row and all rows above,
23700 that don't have any special options defined,
23701 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23702 Except for the first page,
23706 \begin_inset space ~
23714 \begin_layout Description
23718 \begin_inset space ~
23724 The current row and all rows above,
23725 that don't have any special options defined,
23726 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23729 \begin_layout Description
23735 The current row and all rows below,
23736 that don't have any special options defined,
23737 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23738 except for the last page,
23742 \begin_inset space ~
23750 \begin_layout Description
23754 \begin_inset space ~
23760 The current row and all rows below,
23761 that don't have any special options defined,
23762 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23765 \begin_layout Description
23767 The first row is reset as a single column.
23768 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23774 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23777 \begin_inset space ~
23785 \begin_layout Standard
23786 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23787 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
23788 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
23789 the others will be defined as
23795 first means first in this order:
23800 \begin_inset space ~
23814 \begin_inset space ~
23820 see the following longtable to see how it works:
23823 \begin_layout Standard
23825 \begin_inset Tabular
23826 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23827 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23828 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23829 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23830 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23831 <row endfirsthead="true">
23832 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23843 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <row endfirsthead="true">
23863 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23874 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 <row endhead="true">
23896 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 <row endhead="true">
23927 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <row endfoot="true">
23960 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23980 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24011 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24953 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24971 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25044 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25106 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25509 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 <row endlastfoot="true">
25944 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25955 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25964 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25981 \begin_layout Subsection
25983 \begin_inset Index idx
25988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26007 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
26014 \begin_layout Standard
26015 A table cell can contain text,
26019 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
26020 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
26021 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
26027 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
26030 \begin_layout Standard
26031 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
26032 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
26033 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
26037 \begin_layout Standard
26039 \begin_inset Tabular
26040 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
26041 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26043 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
26044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26064 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26133 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26189 This is longer now.
26194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26245 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26246 This is longer now.
26251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 \begin_layout Standard
26278 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
26279 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
26283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26284 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
26289 Selection with the mouse or with
26293 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
26294 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
26297 \begin_layout Section
26299 \begin_inset Index idx
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26320 \begin_layout Subsection
26324 \begin_layout Standard
26325 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
26326 which doesn't have a fixed location.
26328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26335 forward or backward a page or two,
26336 to wherever it fits best.
26344 \begin_inset space ~
26350 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
26353 \begin_layout Standard
26354 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
26355 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
26356 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
26357 every float can be referenced in the text.
26358 Floats are therefore numbered.
26359 Referencing is described in section
26360 \begin_inset space ~
26364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26366 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26382 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
26383 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
26384 After the label you can insert the caption text.
26385 \begin_inset Index idx
26390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26392 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26406 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
26407 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
26408 -document readable,
26409 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
26410 A closed float box looks like this:
26412 \begin_inset Graphics
26413 filename clipart/float.png
26418 – a gray button with a red label.
26421 \begin_layout Standard
26422 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
26423 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
26426 \begin_layout Subsection
26428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26430 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
26435 \begin_inset Index idx
26440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26459 \begin_layout Standard
26461 \begin_inset space ~
26465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26467 reference "fig:A-star-in"
26472 was created using the menu
26474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26475 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26481 arg "float-insert figure"
26485 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
26487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26493 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
26497 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
26499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26501 \begin_inset space ~
26509 arg "layout-paragraph"
26515 \begin_layout Standard
26516 \begin_inset Float figure
26523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26525 \begin_inset Graphics
26526 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26541 name "fig:A-star-in"
26558 \begin_layout Standard
26559 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
26560 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26571 ) and refer to it using the menu
26573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26579 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26583 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
26584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26593 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26594 will reposition the floats in the final document,
26596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26604 For more about cross-references,
26606 \begin_inset space ~
26610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26612 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
26622 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26623 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26624 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
26625 \begin_inset space ~
26629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26631 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26638 \begin_inset space ~
26642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26644 reference "fig:Two-images"
26649 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26650 You can also set the images one below the other.
26652 \begin_inset space ~
26656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26658 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26666 reference "fig:Star"
26671 are the subfigures.
26674 \begin_layout Standard
26675 \begin_inset Float figure
26682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26683 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26687 \begin_inset Float figure
26694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26695 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26700 name "fig:Undefinable"
26712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26713 \begin_inset Graphics
26714 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26726 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26730 \begin_inset Float figure
26737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26738 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26756 \begin_inset Graphics
26757 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26769 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26776 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26781 name "fig:Two-images"
26798 \begin_layout Subsection
26800 \begin_inset Index idx
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26807 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26824 \begin_layout Standard
26825 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26828 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26831 or the toolbar button
26834 arg "float-insert table"
26838 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26840 \begin_inset space ~
26844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26846 reference "tab:Table-float"
26854 \begin_layout Standard
26855 \begin_inset Float table
26862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26863 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26868 name "tab:Table-float"
26880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26882 \begin_inset Tabular
26883 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26884 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26885 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26886 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26887 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27014 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
27022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27035 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27038 \end{array}\right]$
27046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
27080 \begin_layout Subsection
27082 \begin_inset Index idx
27087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27089 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 \begin_layout Standard
27108 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
27109 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
27110 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
27111 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
27118 \begin_inset space ~
27126 \begin_layout Section
27128 \begin_inset Index idx
27133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 \begin_layout Standard
27144 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
27147 all the usual rules of indentation,
27150 \begin_inset space \space{}
27156 \begin_layout Standard
27157 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
27158 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
27160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27164 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
27167 \begin_layout Standard
27169 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27179 height_special "totalheight"
27184 backgroundcolor "none"
27187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 This is a minipage.
27191 The text is set in an italic style.
27194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27197 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
27205 \begin_layout Standard
27206 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27209 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
27214 as described in section
27215 \begin_inset space ~
27219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27221 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
27227 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27234 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27244 height_special "totalheight"
27249 backgroundcolor "none"
27252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27253 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27254 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27260 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27264 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27274 height_special "totalheight"
27279 backgroundcolor "none"
27282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27283 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27284 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27292 \begin_layout Standard
27293 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27300 When you right-click on a minipage box,
27301 you can transform the box to another box type.
27302 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
27309 \begin_inset space ~
27317 \begin_layout Chapter
27318 Mathematical Formulas
27319 \begin_inset Index idx
27324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27331 \begin_inset Index idx
27336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27338 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
27341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27355 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
27362 \begin_layout Standard
27363 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
27368 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
27371 \begin_layout Section
27373 \begin_inset Index idx
27378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27397 \begin_layout Standard
27398 To create a math formula,
27399 you can just click on the toolbar icon
27412 That will create a little blue rectangle,
27413 with purple markers around its corners.
27414 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
27415 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
27416 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
27418 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27424 \begin_layout Standard
27425 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27434 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
27437 \begin_layout Standard
27438 There are two main types of formulas,
27439 inline formulas and display formulas.
27440 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
27444 \begin_layout Standard
27445 This is a line with an inline formula
27446 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
27452 \begin_layout Standard
27453 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
27455 \begin_inset Formula
27462 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
27465 \begin_layout Standard
27467 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
27471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27485 followed by a space,
27486 in a formula will create the Greek letter
27487 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
27491 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
27494 \begin_inset space ~
27502 \begin_layout Subsection
27503 Navigating in Formulas
27504 \begin_inset Index idx
27509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27511 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27528 \begin_layout Standard
27529 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
27531 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
27532 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
27537 will leave a formula construct (a square root
27538 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
27543 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
27548 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27551 \end{array}\right]$
27559 will leave the formula,
27560 placing the cursor after the formula.
27565 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
27567 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
27570 \begin_layout Standard
27576 printed in this document as
27577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27581 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27589 seems to do nothing in a formula,
27590 since it does not add a space between characters,
27591 but it does exit a nested structure.
27593 you have to be careful about using
27600 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27609 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27619 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27623 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27629 since in the latter case only the
27632 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27637 will be under the square root sign:
27639 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27645 \begin_layout Standard
27646 You can leave many parts of a formula,
27648 partially filled in,
27650 \begin_inset Formula
27652 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27661 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
27662 or a subscript with nothing in it,
27663 the results will be unpredictable,
27664 but most constructs don't mind.
27667 \begin_layout Subsection
27671 \begin_layout Standard
27672 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27673 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
27678 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27679 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27681 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27682 That text can then be cut or copied,
27683 and then pasted within any formula,
27684 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27688 \begin_layout Subsection
27689 Exponents and Subscripts
27690 \begin_inset Index idx
27695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27697 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27712 \begin_inset Index idx
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27736 \begin_layout Standard
27737 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27740 arg "math-superscript"
27746 arg "math-subscript"
27750 but it is often much easier to use a command.
27752 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27759 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27769 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27776 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27781 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27788 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27794 If you use characters in the superscript,
27795 that could be accented with the circumflex
27796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27804 you have to use an extra
27808 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27811 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27818 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27824 Subscripts are similar:
27826 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27833 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27841 \begin_layout Subsection
27843 \begin_inset Index idx
27848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27850 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27867 \begin_layout Standard
27868 Create a fraction either with the command
27874 or by using the icon
27877 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27883 \begin_inset space ~
27889 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27890 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27891 To move it to the bottom,
27903 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
27904 as this example shows:
27905 \begin_inset Formula
27907 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27910 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27918 \begin_layout Subsection
27920 \begin_inset Index idx
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27944 \begin_layout Standard
27945 Roots can be created using the
27948 \begin_inset space ~
27956 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27962 arg "math-insert \\root"
27984 you can produce roots of higher orders,
27992 always produces a square root.
27995 \begin_layout Subsection
27996 Operators with Limits
27997 \begin_inset Index idx
28002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28004 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28019 \begin_inset Index idx
28024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28026 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28043 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28050 \begin_layout Standard
28052 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
28056 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
28059 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
28060 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28061 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
28062 directly after the symbol.
28063 The sum operator will automatically place its
28064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28071 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
28072 and to the side in inline formulas,
28074 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
28079 \begin_inset Formula
28081 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
28088 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
28091 \begin_layout Standard
28092 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
28093 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
28095 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28096 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28098 \begin_inset space ~
28102 \begin_inset space ~
28116 \begin_layout Standard
28117 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
28118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28127 \begin_inset Index idx
28132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28134 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28149 \begin_inset Formula
28151 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
28156 which will place the
28157 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
28161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28169 In inline formulas it looks like this:
28171 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
28185 Have a look at section
28186 \begin_inset space ~
28190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28192 reference "subsec:Functions"
28197 for an explanation of function macros.
28200 \begin_layout Subsection
28202 \begin_inset Index idx
28207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28209 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28226 \begin_layout Standard
28227 Most math symbols can be found in the
28230 \begin_inset space ~
28235 under one of several categories;
28256 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
28259 \begin_layout Standard
28260 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28261 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
28262 you don't have to use the
28265 \begin_inset space ~
28271 you can type the command directly into the formula.
28273 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
28276 \begin_layout Subsection
28278 \begin_inset Index idx
28283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28302 \begin_layout Standard
28303 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28309 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
28315 \begin_inset space ~
28323 arg "math-insert \\space"
28327 This generates a small space,
28328 and shows a small marker on the screen.
28336 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
28339 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28341 \begin_inset Graphics
28342 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
28347 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
28348 With every space enter the size will be changed.
28349 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
28351 because they are negative spaces.
28352 Here are two examples:
28355 \begin_layout Standard
28366 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
28372 \begin_layout Standard
28383 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
28389 \begin_layout Subsection
28391 \begin_inset Index idx
28396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28415 name "subsec:Functions"
28422 \begin_layout Standard
28426 \begin_inset space ~
28431 contains under the button
28434 arg "math-insert \\functions"
28437 a number of function macros,
28439 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
28444 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
28453 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
28460 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
28462 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
28466 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
28472 \begin_layout Standard
28473 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
28475 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
28479 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
28485 \begin_layout Standard
28486 For some mathematical objects,
28488 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
28489 as described in section
28490 \begin_inset space ~
28494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28496 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28504 \begin_layout Subsection
28506 \begin_inset Index idx
28511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28513 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28530 \begin_layout Standard
28531 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
28532 This may depend on your keyboard,
28533 or the bindings file you use.
28534 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28538 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28541 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
28542 Our example is entered by typing
28547 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28554 \begin_inset space ~
28558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28560 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
28565 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
28568 \begin_layout Standard
28569 \begin_inset Float table
28576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28577 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28582 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
28586 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
28594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28596 \begin_inset Tabular
28597 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
28598 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28599 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28600 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28601 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28685 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28739 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
28749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28793 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28847 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28901 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28955 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29009 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
29019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29063 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
29073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29117 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
29127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29162 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
29183 \begin_layout Standard
29184 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29195 arg "math-insert \\hat"
29199 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
29202 \begin_layout Section
29203 Brackets and Delimiters
29204 \begin_inset Index idx
29209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29211 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29226 \begin_inset Index idx
29231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29233 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29250 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29257 \begin_layout Standard
29258 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
29261 using just the keys
29266 But if you want to surround a large structure,
29267 like a matrix or a fraction,
29268 or if you have several layers of brackets,
29269 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
29272 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29277 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
29278 \begin_inset Formula
29280 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
29288 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
29290 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
29293 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29296 and the expression on the right was entered using the
29302 \begin_inset Formula
29304 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
29312 \begin_layout Standard
29313 If you use the delimiter icon,
29315 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
29318 \begin_layout Standard
29319 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
29320 If you use the option
29323 \begin_inset space ~
29329 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
29330 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
29332 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
29338 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
29339 with a dotted line,
29340 but nothing will be printed.
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29344 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
29345 like a square root,
29346 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
29347 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
29352 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
29355 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
29357 to insert a pair of parentheses,
29358 select the structure and enter
29361 arg "math-delim ( )"
29367 \begin_layout Section
29368 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
29369 \begin_inset Index idx
29374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29376 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29391 \begin_inset Index idx
29396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29413 \begin_inset Index idx
29418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29424 Multi-line Equations
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29438 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29442 \begin_inset space ~
29450 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
29454 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
29455 Here is an example:
29456 \begin_inset Formula
29458 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29467 The parentheses aren't automatic,
29468 but you can add them as described in section
29469 \begin_inset space ~
29473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29475 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29481 When you construct the matrix,
29482 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
29484 or center-justified.
29485 This alignment is set in the box
29490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29541 for every column as default.
29544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29555 means that the first column will be left-justified,
29556 the second will be centered,
29557 and the third column will be right-justified,
29558 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
29559 The result will look like this:
29560 \begin_inset Formula
29563 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
29564 column & has & has\,right\\
29565 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
29574 \begin_layout Standard
29575 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
29578 arg "newline-insert newline"
29581 while the cursor is in the matrix.
29582 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
29584 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29587 or the math toolbar.
29590 \begin_layout Standard
29591 There are other arrays used in formulas,
29592 such as distinctions of cases.
29593 It can be created with the menu
29595 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29596 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29598 \begin_inset space ~
29610 Here is an example:
29612 \begin_inset Formula
29626 \begin_layout Standard
29627 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29630 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
29633 arg "newline-insert newline"
29637 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
29638 one for each column.
29642 arg "newline-insert newline"
29645 in a non-empty formula,
29646 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
29647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29654 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
29655 the relation sign is in the second column,
29656 and the rest in the third column.
29657 A new row is created by every further entry of
29660 arg "newline-insert newline"
29664 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
29665 Here is an example:
29666 \begin_inset Formula
29668 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
29669 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
29674 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
29675 \begin_inset Formula
29677 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29686 The multi-line formula type described here is called
29693 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
29694 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
29695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29697 reference "eq:asquared"
29703 The other types are described in section
29704 \begin_inset space ~
29708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29710 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29718 \begin_layout Section
29719 Formula Numbering and Referencing
29720 \begin_inset Index idx
29725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29727 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29742 \begin_inset Index idx
29747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29749 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29753 Referencing formulas
29764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29766 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29773 \begin_layout Standard
29774 To number a formula,
29775 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
29777 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29778 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29780 \begin_inset space ~
29784 \begin_inset space ~
29792 arg "math-number-toggle"
29796 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29797 within parentheses.
29798 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
29799 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
29800 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
29801 separated by a dot:
29802 \begin_inset Formula
29812 arg "math-number-toggle"
29815 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
29816 You can only number displayed formulas.
29819 \begin_layout Standard
29820 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
29823 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29824 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29826 \begin_inset space ~
29830 \begin_inset space ~
29838 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
29841 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
29842 \begin_inset Formula
29845 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
29851 To number all lines use the shortcut
29854 arg "math-number-toggle"
29860 \begin_layout Standard
29861 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29864 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
29865 A label is inserted with the menu
29867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29876 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
29877 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
29878 It is recommended that you use the suggested
29879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29890 as the first part of the label,
29891 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
29892 We inserted in the following example the label
29893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29900 in the second line:
29901 \begin_inset Formula
29903 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29904 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29909 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29910 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29911 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29915 \begin_inset space ~
29923 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29927 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29928 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29929 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29936 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29944 \begin_layout Standard
29945 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29946 's cross-reference box are described in section
29947 \begin_inset space ~
29951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29953 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29960 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
29967 \begin_layout Section
29968 User defined math macros
29969 \begin_inset Index idx
29974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29976 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29993 \begin_layout Standard
29995 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29996 Math macros are explained in section
29999 \begin_inset space ~
30011 \begin_layout Section
30015 \begin_layout Subsection
30017 \begin_inset Index idx
30022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30041 \begin_layout Standard
30042 The standard font for text is italic,
30043 for numbers the standard is roman.
30044 To set a font in a formula,
30048 \begin_inset space ~
30056 arg "math-insert \\font"
30060 or enter its command,
30062 \begin_inset space ~
30066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30068 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30077 \begin_layout Standard
30078 \begin_inset Float table
30085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30086 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30091 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30095 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
30103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30105 \begin_inset Tabular
30106 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
30107 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30108 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30109 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30141 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
30149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
30176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30195 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
30203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30228 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
30236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30255 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
30263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30282 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
30290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30309 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
30317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30343 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
30351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30377 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
30385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
30412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30438 \begin_layout Standard
30439 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30448 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
30470 \begin_layout Standard
30471 When you use a typeface,
30472 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
30473 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
30478 within the box will set the cursor outside,
30479 so that you have to use a non-breaking space when you need a space in the box.
30480 Here is an example where
30481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30492 denotes the set of numbers:
30493 \begin_inset Formula
30495 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 The typefaces are nestable,
30505 which can cause confusion.
30518 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
30522 \begin_inset Newline newline
30525 So it is better not to use this feature.
30528 \begin_layout Standard
30529 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
30531 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
30535 \begin_inset Newline newline
30538 You can only print them emboldened using the command
30545 which works like the other typeface commands:
30547 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
30553 \begin_layout Standard
30560 works for all symbols,
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30566 A number of other font options are available as well,
30569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30570 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30572 \begin_inset space ~
30580 \begin_layout Subsection
30582 \begin_inset Index idx
30587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30606 \begin_layout Standard
30607 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
30609 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
30610 which is obtained using the entry
30613 \begin_inset space ~
30617 \begin_inset space ~
30625 \begin_inset space ~
30633 arg "math-insert \\font"
30637 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30638 in black instead of blue.
30639 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
30640 Here is an example:
30641 \begin_inset Formula
30644 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
30645 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
30654 \begin_layout Subsection
30656 \begin_inset Index idx
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30680 \begin_layout Standard
30681 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
30682 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
30703 For most characters,
30712 are actually the same size,
30714 superscripts and subscripts,
30715 and certain other structures,
30721 Except for some operators,
30722 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
30723 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30724 thinks are appropriate.
30725 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
30728 arg "math-insert \\style"
30732 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
30735 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
30739 which is normally in
30750 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
30754 The four styles are used in the following example:
30757 \begin_layout Standard
30758 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
30763 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
30768 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
30773 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
30779 \begin_layout Standard
30780 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
30782 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30784 \begin_inset space ~
30790 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
30792 if the base font size of the document is changed,
30793 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
30794 As an example here is a formula in the font size
30795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30805 \begin_layout Standard
30809 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
30815 \begin_layout Section
30816 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30818 \begin_inset Index idx
30823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30830 \begin_inset Index idx
30835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30837 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30856 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
30859 \begin_layout Subsection
30860 Enabling AMS-Support
30863 \begin_layout Standard
30864 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by setting
30878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30882 \begin_inset Index idx
30887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30906 \begin_inset space ~
30912 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
30913 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30914 -errors in formulas,
30915 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
30918 \begin_layout Subsection
30920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30922 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30927 \begin_inset Index idx
30932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30938 Multi-line Equations
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30953 provides a selection of different formula types.
30955 allows you to choose between
30980 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
30982 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30990 for an explanation of these formula types.
30993 \begin_layout Chapter
30997 \begin_layout Section
30999 \begin_inset Index idx
31004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31013 name "sec:Cross-References"
31020 \begin_layout Standard
31021 One of \SpecialChar LyX
31022 's strengths is cross-references.
31023 You can reference every section,
31027 and list in the document.
31028 To reference a document part,
31029 you have to insert a label into it.
31030 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
31031 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
31034 \begin_layout Enumerate
31038 \begin_layout Enumerate
31039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31041 name "enu:Second-item"
31048 \begin_layout Enumerate
31052 \begin_layout Standard
31053 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
31055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31058 or by pressing the toolbar button
31065 A gray label box like this:
31067 \begin_inset Graphics
31068 filename clipart/label.png
31072 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
31074 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
31075 in our case the text
31076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31109 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
31111 if you insert a label into a section heading,
31112 the suggested prefix will be
31113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31127 \begin_layout Standard
31128 To reference the item,
31129 we refer to its label using the menu
31131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31134 or the toolbar button
31137 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
31141 A gray cross-reference box like this:
31143 \begin_inset Graphics
31144 filename clipart/reference.png
31148 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
31149 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
31150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31162 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
31165 \begin_layout Standard
31166 As an alternative to
31168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31172 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
31177 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
31179 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31191 \begin_layout Standard
31192 Here is our cross-reference:
31194 \begin_inset space ~
31198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31200 reference "enu:Second-item"
31208 \begin_layout Standard
31209 It is recommended to use a non-breaking space
31213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31214 described in section
31215 \begin_inset space ~
31219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31221 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
31231 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
31234 \begin_layout Standard
31235 There are eight formats of cross-references:
31238 \begin_layout Description
31241 this is the default:
31243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31245 reference "fig:Two-images"
31253 \begin_layout Description
31255 prints the number within two parentheses,
31256 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
31257 especially when the reference name
31258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31269 reference "eq:tanhExp"
31277 \begin_layout Description
31279 prints the page number:
31281 \begin_inset space ~
31285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31286 LatexCommand pageref
31287 reference "fig:Two-images"
31295 \begin_layout Description
31297 \begin_inset space ~
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31305 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
31307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31308 LatexCommand vpageref
31309 reference "fig:Two-images"
31315 \begin_inset Newline newline
31318 If the label is on the same page,
31319 it prints “on this page”;
31320 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
31321 it prints “on the facing page”;
31322 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
31323 it prints “on the previous page”;
31324 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
31325 it prints “on the next page”.
31326 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
31329 \begin_layout Description
31331 \begin_inset space ~
31335 \begin_inset space ~
31339 \begin_inset space ~
31344 the text “on page” and the page number:
31346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31348 reference "fig:Two-images"
31354 \begin_inset Newline newline
31357 If the label is on the same page,
31358 this format behaves like
31365 otherwise it behaves like
31369 \begin_inset space ~
31373 \begin_inset space ~
31382 \begin_layout Description
31384 \begin_inset space ~
31388 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
31389 \begin_inset Newline newline
31393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31402 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31412 \begin_inset Index idx
31417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31420 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31435 \begin_inset Index idx
31440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31443 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31463 \begin_inset Newline newline
31466 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
31467 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
31469 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
31473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31474 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31482 is the default and preferred because
31486 supports only English documents.
31487 The format is specified by using the command
31491 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31500 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31501 preamble of the document.
31502 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
31503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31519 \begin_inset Newline newline
31526 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
31531 \begin_inset Newline newline
31542 predefines reference formats for all available types.
31543 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
31544 So if you want to make formatted references to,
31547 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
31553 you might do so as follows:
31554 \begin_inset Newline newline
31561 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31562 format{prop}{Proposition
31567 \begin_inset Newline newline
31570 For more information about defining formatted references,
31571 have a look at the package documentation
31572 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31574 key "prettyref,refstyle"
31580 \begin_inset Newline newline
31591 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
31596 \begin_inset Newline newline
31599 If you activate the option
31601 Format cross-references in work area
31605 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
31608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31616 rather than just displaying the label.
31619 \begin_layout Description
31621 \begin_inset space ~
31625 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
31627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31628 LatexCommand nameref
31629 reference "fig:Two-images"
31637 \begin_layout Description
31639 \begin_inset space ~
31643 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31644 label for the reference:
31646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31647 LatexCommand labelonly
31648 reference "fig:Two-images"
31654 \begin_inset Newline newline
31657 This allows for customization,
31658 using \SpecialChar TeX
31660 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
31667 then you may want to use the
31670 \begin_inset space ~
31676 which will output only the part of the reference following the
31677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31685 This is the form needed for e.
31686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31690 \begin_inset space \space{}
31697 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31699 The varieties are adjusted in the field
31703 of the cross-reference window,
31704 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
31707 \begin_layout Standard
31708 You can only use the style
31712 to reference numbered document parts,
31713 while the reference style
31717 is always possible.
31720 \begin_layout Standard
31721 If you want to reference a section,
31722 put the label in the section heading;
31723 for floats put the label in the caption;
31724 for footnotes put the label in it.
31725 Referencing formulas is explained in section
31726 \begin_inset space ~
31730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31732 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31740 \begin_layout Standard
31741 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
31745 \begin_inset space ~
31749 \begin_inset space ~
31754 sets the cursor before the referenced label (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label).
31755 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
31758 \begin_inset space ~
31763 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
31764 You can also go back with the toolbar button
31767 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
31774 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
31775 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
31781 \begin_layout Standard
31782 You can change labels at any time.
31783 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to change them all manually.
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
31788 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
31789 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
31792 \begin_layout Standard
31793 References are described in detail in the section
31804 \begin_layout Section
31805 Table of Contents and other Listings
31806 \begin_inset Index idx
31811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31818 \begin_inset Index idx
31823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31825 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31840 \begin_inset Index idx
31845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31861 \begin_layout Subsection
31863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31865 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
31872 \begin_layout Standard
31873 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
31875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31876 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31878 \begin_inset space ~
31882 \begin_inset space ~
31888 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
31890 If you click on it,
31896 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
31897 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
31898 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
31900 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31902 \begin_inset space ~
31907 that is described in section
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31914 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
31924 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
31925 as described in section
31926 \begin_inset space ~
31930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31932 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
31938 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
31940 \begin_inset space ~
31944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31946 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
31951 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
31952 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
31955 \begin_layout Subsection
31958 Listings and Algorithms
31959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31961 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31971 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
31972 You can insert them via the
31974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31975 List/Contents/References
31978 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
31981 \begin_layout Section
31982 URLs and Hyperlinks
31983 \begin_inset Index idx
31988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31995 \begin_inset Index idx
32000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32009 \begin_layout Subsection
32011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
32023 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32030 Here is an example URL:
32034 \begin_inset Flex URL
32037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32039 https://www.lyx.org
32047 \begin_layout Standard
32049 the URL text will always be in the style
32054 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
32056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32057 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32063 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32069 \begin_layout Standard
32093 (use whatever the current text font is).
32094 To have italicized URLs,
32098 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32110 \begin_layout Standard
32111 URLs will break between lines at certain characters,
32115 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32126 \begin_layout Standard
32127 It does not break at a hyphen (
32132 but you can change that by adding
32138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32139 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32140 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
32141 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
32145 If this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
32146 a last resort is to put
32154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32155 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32159 this will cause URLs to be broken at every character.
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32163 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32172 URLs must not end with a backslash,
32173 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32182 \begin_layout Subsection
32184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32186 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
32193 \begin_layout Standard
32194 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
32196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32199 or with the toolbar button
32206 The appearing dialog has two fields:
32216 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
32217 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
32219 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32221 name "LyX's homepage"
32222 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32228 an Email address like this:
32230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32232 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
32233 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
32240 a link to a file or any other valid URI (such as
32249 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32257 \begin_layout Standard
32258 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
32259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32270 to the link target,
32271 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons.
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32275 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
32276 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
32277 To set the format of the link text,
32278 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
32279 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
32284 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32286 name "LyX's homepage"
32287 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32296 The link text color can be changed,
32301 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
32303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32304 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32308 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
32309 \begin_inset Newline newline
32317 \begin_inset Newline newline
32324 in the PDF Properties dialog.
32327 \begin_layout Standard
32328 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
32329 you can use context menu (or directly via
32331 Ctrl + right mouse button
32336 \begin_layout Section
32338 \begin_inset Index idx
32343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32352 name "sec:Counters"
32359 \begin_layout Standard
32360 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32361 is its ability to manage counters.
32363 this is handled automatically,
32364 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
32365 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
32366 using the counter inset,
32367 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
32368 This allows one to set a counter's value;
32369 to reset it (to zero);
32373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32374 Note that the section counter,
32376 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
32378 if you want the next section to be section five,
32380 then you need to set the section counter to four.
32385 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
32386 since the value added can be negative);
32388 to restore the saved value;
32389 and to print the value.
32390 These effects can also be limited to \SpecialChar LyX
32392 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
32393 as well as in \SpecialChar LaTeX
32397 \begin_layout Standard
32398 There are five commands you can use:
32401 \begin_layout Enumerate
32407 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
32410 \begin_layout Enumerate
32416 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
32417 if you choose a negative number)
32420 \begin_layout Enumerate
32426 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
32429 \begin_layout Enumerate
32432 Save value of counter:
32435 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
32438 \begin_layout Enumerate
32441 Restore value of counter:
32444 Restores the previously saved value.
32447 \begin_layout Standard
32448 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
32451 \begin_layout Section
32453 \begin_inset Index idx
32458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32467 name "sec:Appendices"
32474 \begin_layout Standard
32475 Appendices are created with the menu
32477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32479 \begin_inset space ~
32483 \begin_inset space ~
32489 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
32490 This part is marked with a red borderline.
32493 \begin_layout Standard
32494 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
32495 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
32496 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
32497 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
32501 \begin_layout Standard
32503 \begin_inset space ~
32507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32509 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
32519 \begin_inset space ~
32523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32525 reference "subsec:Export"
32533 \begin_layout Section
32535 \begin_inset Index idx
32540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32549 name "sec:Bibliography"
32556 \begin_layout Standard
32557 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
32559 You can include a bibliography database,
32560 which is explained in sec.
32561 \begin_inset space ~
32565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32567 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32576 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
32577 using the paragraph environment
32582 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
32583 \begin_inset space ~
32587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32589 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
32595 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
32596 such as author-year citations,
32597 and if you have more than a handful of references,
32598 then you should seriously consider
32602 using a bibliography database.
32605 \begin_layout Standard
32606 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
32607 we use two bibliographies in this document,
32612 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
32614 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
32616 the database approach relieves you,
32617 amongst other things,
32618 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
32621 \begin_layout Subsection
32622 The Bibliography Environment
32623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32625 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32632 \begin_layout Standard
32638 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
32639 If you click on it,
32640 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
32649 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
32650 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
32651 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
32655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32657 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32660 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
32666 \begin_inset Newline newline
32670 \begin_inset Flex URL
32673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32675 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
32686 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32696 a short form of its title,
32698 \begin_inset Newline newline
32706 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
32711 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32719 \begin_layout Standard
32720 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
32722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32725 or the toolbar button
32728 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
32732 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
32733 Select one or more keys from the list and
32743 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
32744 If you click on the box,
32745 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
32748 \begin_layout Standard
32749 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
32750 Here are two examples;
32751 the first without a label,
32752 the second with the label
32753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32763 \begin_layout Standard
32767 Companion Second Edition
32771 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32773 key "latexcompanion"
32781 \begin_layout Standard
32782 The \SpecialChar LyX
32783 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
32785 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32795 \begin_layout Standard
32796 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
32797 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32803 \begin_inset Index idx
32808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32811 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32830 \begin_inset space ~
32835 in the document settings
32836 \begin_inset Index idx
32841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32843 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32859 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
32861 \begin_inset space ~
32867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32869 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
32878 Once you have done that,
32881 Bibliography item settings
32883 dialog has three input fields instead of the
32902 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
32903 the second the year (without parentheses).
32904 These two are madatory.
32905 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
32911 ) and in abrreviated form (
32916 add the abbreviated form to
32920 and the full list to the optional
32925 If specified like this,
32926 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles in the
32928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32945 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list.
32946 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
32947 In the bibliography entry,
32948 author and year must be added manually.
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
32954 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32956 \begin_inset space ~
32964 arg "layout-paragraph"
32968 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
32971 \begin_layout Subsection
32972 Bibliography databases
32973 \begin_inset Index idx
32978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32980 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32997 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33004 \begin_layout Standard
33005 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
33009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33010 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
33011 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
33016 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
33017 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
33018 This database can be used for different documents,
33019 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
33020 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33024 The database is a text file with the file extension
33025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33037 containing the bibliography in a special format.
33038 The format is explained in
33039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33046 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33048 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33050 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
33056 The file can be created using any text editor,
33057 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
33058 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
33060 \begin_inset Flex URL
33063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33065 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
33073 \begin_layout Standard
33075 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
33076 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33077 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
33078 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
33079 But it has its drawbacks,
33080 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
33081 Those are addressed by
33086 \begin_inset Index idx
33091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33094 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33109 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33110 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33121 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33123 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33124 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
33134 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
33137 \begin_layout Standard
33138 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33144 set in the document settings (menu
33146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33150 \begin_inset Index idx
33155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33157 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33178 \begin_inset space ~
33183 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33192 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33194 \begin_inset Index idx
33199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33201 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33205 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33219 \begin_layout Standard
33220 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33225 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33233 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33241 Add bibliography to TOC
33243 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
33248 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
33253 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
33254 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
33257 \begin_layout Standard
33258 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33259 style file is a text file with the file extension
33260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33271 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
33272 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33273 distribution should provide several of these,
33274 and many publishers provide their own style files,
33275 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
33276 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
33277 but this is something for experts.
33281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33282 For information on how this is done,
33284 \begin_inset Newline newline
33288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33290 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
33300 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33306 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33310 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
33313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33315 \begin_inset Index idx
33320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33337 \begin_inset Index idx
33342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33362 \begin_layout Standard
33363 Accessing a database via
33367 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33372 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33374 \begin_inset space ~
33380 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33381 you cannot select a
33385 file at this place.
33386 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33389 note the following.
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33397 has two different style files:
33398 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
33399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33410 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
33411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33422 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
33423 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
33424 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
33427 \begin_layout Standard
33432 styles are not set in the
33435 \begin_inset space ~
33441 but in the document settings.
33442 \begin_inset Index idx
33447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33449 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33464 in the dialog in the
33469 which is only visible if you use
33474 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
33475 These options are described in detail in the
33481 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33491 \begin_layout Standard
33492 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33499 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33510 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33511 Bibliography Processors
33514 \begin_layout Standard
33515 To generate the bibliography from a database,
33517 uses a bibliography processor,
33518 that is an external program that reads the database,
33519 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
33520 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33522 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
33523 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
33527 \begin_layout Standard
33529 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
33530 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
33531 You can do this on a general level in
33533 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33534 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33535 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33538 or for individual documents in
33540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33545 The following variants are available by default:
33548 \begin_layout Description
33551 \begin_inset Index idx
33556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33573 developed exclusively for
33577 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33583 provides full Unicode support,
33584 unlimited memory and many specific features
33594 it is strongly recommended to use
33601 \begin_layout Description
33602 bibtex the standard;
33603 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
33605 works with all bibliography packages,
33606 although it will probably fail with
33610 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
33613 \begin_layout Description
33614 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
33620 works with all bibliography packages,
33621 although more complex
33625 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
33630 features are supported.
33633 \begin_layout Standard
33634 By default (with the
33640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33641 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33654 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33655 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33656 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33661 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
33674 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33675 -based bibliography styles).
33676 This should suit most needs.
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33680 In Japanese documents,
33681 a specific processor is used.
33682 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
33683 (in \SpecialChar LyX
33689 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33690 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
33691 You can adjust it in
33693 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33694 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33695 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33701 \begin_layout Standard
33702 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
33703 Before adding options,
33704 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33725 \begin_layout Standard
33727 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
33728 These are explained in detail in section
33730 Customizing Bibliographies
33734 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33739 Additional Features
33741 manual.Citation Format
33742 \begin_inset Index idx
33747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33766 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
33773 \begin_layout Standard
33774 Many different citation formats are common,
33776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33780 \begin_inset space \space{}
33783 numerical citation (as
33784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33791 like in this document),
33792 alpha-numerical citations (as
33793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33800 ) or author-year citations (as
33801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33810 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
33813 \begin_layout Standard
33814 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
33817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33818 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33822 \begin_inset Index idx
33827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33829 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 you have a range of other options,
33844 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
33849 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33864 \begin_inset space ~
33869 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
33870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33872 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 With a bibliography database (see
33882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33884 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33892 ) one has in contrary to the
33896 environment full access to the formatting styles.
33897 These style formats are available:
33900 \begin_layout Description
33902 \begin_inset space ~
33905 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33906 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
33909 \begin_layout Description
33910 Biblatex loads the package
33915 \begin_inset Index idx
33920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33937 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
33939 Biblatex citation style
33943 Biblatex bibliography style
33946 Options to the package
33950 can be entered in the
33957 \begin_layout Description
33959 \begin_inset space ~
33963 \begin_inset space ~
33966 mode) loads the package
33970 with the natbib compatibility mode.
33971 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
33982 behavior very closely.
33987 this option has some additional styles.
33992 styles are also supported by this variant.
33995 \begin_layout Description
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34000 (BibTeX) loads the package
34005 \begin_inset Index idx
34010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34013 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34027 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
34030 \begin_layout Description
34032 \begin_inset space ~
34035 (BibTeX) loads the package
34040 \begin_inset Index idx
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34048 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34062 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34074 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
34075 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
34085 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
34087 Whether the output uses numerical,
34088 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
34090 Biblatex citation style
34094 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
34095 a suitable style is proposed.
34102 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
34105 \begin_layout Standard
34106 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
34107 multiple style variants are available in the
34112 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
34113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34128 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
34129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34133 \begin_inset space \space{}
34137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34149 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
34151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34155 \begin_inset space \space{}
34159 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
34160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34164 \begin_inset space \space{}
34168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34180 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34184 \begin_inset space ~
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34198 Here is a simple example where the text
34199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34203 \begin_inset space ~
34207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34210 appears after the reference:
34213 \begin_layout Quote
34215 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34218 key "latexcompanion"
34226 \begin_layout Standard
34227 All styles except for
34231 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
34232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34240 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
34241 if the style requires this.
34244 \begin_layout Standard
34245 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
34246 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
34247 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
34248 the postnote will follow the last.
34253 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
34254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34257 qualified citation lists
34258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34264 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
34268 dialog will display three columns in the field
34276 \begin_inset space ~
34285 \begin_inset space ~
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34299 If you double-click on an item's
34302 \begin_inset space ~
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34316 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
34319 General text before
34325 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
34328 \begin_layout Subsection
34329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34331 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
34335 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34341 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34352 \begin_inset space ~
34356 \begin_inset space ~
34359 Content\SpecialChar ldots
34362 context menu if specific conditions are met:
34365 \begin_layout Itemize
34366 If citation entries include any of the fields
34367 \begin_inset Flex Code
34370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34377 \begin_inset Flex Code
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34386 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
34388 \begin_inset Flex Code
34391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34397 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
34402 \begin_inset Flex Code
34405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34412 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
34415 \begin_layout Itemize
34416 If citation entries include any of the fields
34417 \begin_inset Flex Code
34420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34426 (filled by JabRef and Zotero) or
34427 \begin_inset Flex Code
34430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34436 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
34437 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
34438 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
34441 \begin_layout Standard
34442 In addition to that,
34448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34449 By default we provide python script
34450 \begin_inset Flex Code
34453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34460 but you can use any modified script by setting
34461 \begin_inset Flex Code
34464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34467 citation_search_view
34472 variable in the file
34476 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
34478 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
34482 The default setting is to be found in the file
34486 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
34491 your disk for matching files if you enable
34493 Search drive for cited files
34497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34498 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
34499 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34500 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34504 It uses the tokens supplied at
34508 in the same preferences section (by default:
34513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34514 Provided by token sequence
34515 \begin_inset Flex Code
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34519 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
34525 Note that some constituents (
34526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34543 commas) are automatically stripped from the result.
34549 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the name of the file (at arbitrary position).
34551 opens the first matching file it finds.
34552 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
34553 the more systematic your file naming is,
34554 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
34555 the greater the chance this works for you.
34558 \begin_layout Standard
34559 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
34560 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34562 \begin_inset Flex Code
34565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34572 \begin_inset Flex Code
34575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34582 but there are also special keys,
34583 which are documented in the
34585 Customization manual
34591 Cite format description
34596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34597 Security implications
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 Note that any document (or mainly
34602 \begin_inset Flex Code
34605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34611 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
34614 \begin_layout Standard
34615 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
34616 but beware what you are doing).
34619 \begin_layout Section
34621 \begin_inset Index idx
34626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34642 \begin_layout Standard
34643 An index entry is created if you use the menu
34645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34647 \begin_inset space ~
34652 or the toolbar button
34659 \begin_inset space ~
34663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34665 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
34670 for some advanced methods).
34671 A collapsible inset with green label is inserted;
34672 this holds the text that appears in the index (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
34675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34682 index inset in the heading above for example).
34683 The word where the cursor is in,
34684 or the currently highlighted text,
34685 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
34687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34691 copied into the inset).
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34695 The index list (which prints out the index in your document) is inserted via the menu
34697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34698 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34700 \begin_inset space ~
34706 A light blue box labeled
34707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34718 will show the place where the index will be printed.
34720 the index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
34722 as there are no settings to make.
34723 This changes if you select
34724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34727 Use multiple indexes
34728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34732 \begin_inset space ~
34736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34738 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
34748 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
34751 \begin_layout Standard
34753 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
34755 you can customize index entries to look different.
34756 You can group index entries hierarchically,
34757 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
34758 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
34759 or additionally to,
34761 you can format the page reference (e.
34762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34766 make it bold for specific pages),
34767 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
34768 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
34770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34782 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34786 We describe these features in turn in the next subsections.
34787 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34788 's index mechanism,
34789 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34791 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34793 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
34801 \begin_layout Subsection
34802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34804 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
34808 Grouping Index Entries
34809 \begin_inset Index idx
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34816 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34833 \begin_layout Standard
34834 Index entries are often hierarchically grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index and to hold categories together (e.g.,
34840 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34847 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34854 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
34857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34858 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
34868 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
34869 Maximally two such subentry insets,
34871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34875 three levels of grouping in total,
34876 are allowed per index entry.
34877 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
34878 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
34879 In the \SpecialChar LyX
34881 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
34886 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34895 \begin_layout Standard
34897 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
34898 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry).
34901 \begin_layout Standard
34902 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34904 subentries are indicated by a preceding exclamation mark character
34905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34913 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
34915 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
34917 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
34919 \begin_inset space ~
34923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34925 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
34934 \begin_layout Subsection
34936 \begin_inset Index idx
34941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34943 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34962 an index entry refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted.
34963 If you want to refer to a page range instead,
34964 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
34965 one that marks the beginning of the range,
34966 the other that marks its end.
34967 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
34968 To mark start and end,
34969 select the respective
34973 option in the index inset settings dialog.
34974 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
34975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34993 \begin_layout Standard
34994 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
34995 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
34996 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
34999 \begin_layout Subsection
35001 \begin_inset Index idx
35006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35008 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35025 \begin_layout Standard
35026 It is also possible to refer to another index entry rather than,
35029 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
35031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35043 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
35044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35056 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35063 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35085 \begin_layout Standard
35086 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
35089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35090 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35096 \begin_layout Standard
35097 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
35100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35101 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35113 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
35114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35132 \begin_layout Subsection
35133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35135 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35140 \begin_inset Index idx
35145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35147 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35164 \begin_layout Standard
35165 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
35166 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
35170 ) if you use accented characters in the index entry or if you use macros.
35173 \begin_layout Standard
35174 To accommodate for that,
35177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35178 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35182 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
35183 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
35185 you can pass the sort key
35186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35197 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
35200 \begin_layout Standard
35201 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35203 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
35204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35212 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35214 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
35216 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
35218 \begin_inset space ~
35222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35224 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35232 \begin_layout Subsection
35233 Index Entry Formatting
35234 \begin_inset Index idx
35239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35241 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35258 \begin_layout Standard
35259 The appearance of index entries can be formatted as usual via the text style dialog,
35260 the toolbar or shortcuts.
35261 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry.
35262 \begin_inset Index idx
35267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35269 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35275 This is an italic dummy entry
35285 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
35287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35300 will be listed separately.
35304 \begin_layout Standard
35305 To format a page reference,
35310 option in the index entry settings dialog.
35311 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
35331 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
35338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35342 a self-defined command
35343 \begin_inset Flex Code
35346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35352 or an existing macro such as
35353 \begin_inset Flex Code
35356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35367 we encourage you to use self-defined commands.
35368 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
35369 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
35371 add a formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined by putting the following in the preamble
35374 \begin_layout Standard
35386 \begin_layout Standard
35387 and add the custom formatting
35388 \begin_inset Flex Code
35391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35397 to the respective entry settings dialog.
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35401 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
35402 If you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
35403 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
35404 not every single index entry.
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35408 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35417 If you use the index processor
35423 makeindex or xindex
35426 \begin_inset space ~
35430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35432 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
35438 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
35443 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
35444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35451 (style file) you use before they can be used.
35453 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
35456 \begin_layout Verbatim
35458 (markup-locref :open "
35460 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
35463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35465 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35468 key "latexcompanion"
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 You can also change the layout of the whole index.
35484 if you mark the index list box as bold,
35485 you will get a bold font for all index entries.
35488 it is better (and required for more advanced tasks) to set up a so-called
35513 ) to determine the formatting;
35514 please refer to the
35527 documentations for details,
35529 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35531 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
35537 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35538 packages available that ease such formatting,
35540 \begin_inset Flex URL
35543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35545 https://ctan.org/topic/index
35553 \begin_layout Subsection
35554 Special Characters in Index Entries
35555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35557 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35564 \begin_layout Standard
35565 As already mentioned above,
35566 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
35569 \begin_inset Flex Code
35572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35580 \begin_inset Flex Code
35583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35591 \begin_inset Flex Code
35594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35595 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35605 \begin_inset Flex Code
35608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35615 If you use them literally,
35616 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
35618 you will not get the character itself.
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
35624 \begin_inset Quotes els
35628 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35632 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
35634 the escape character is
35635 \begin_inset Flex Code
35638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35639 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35647 (but this can be changed).
35649 \begin_inset Flex Code
35652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35653 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35663 \begin_inset Flex Code
35666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35667 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35677 \begin_inset Flex Code
35680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35681 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35685 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
35695 \begin_inset Flex Code
35698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35699 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35707 to get the special character you want.
35708 Note that the escape character,
35710 \begin_inset Flex Code
35713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35714 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35727 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35734 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35742 \begin_layout Subsection
35743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35745 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
35749 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
35752 \begin_layout Standard
35753 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
35754 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
35755 This is not only time-consuming,
35756 but also error-prone;
35758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35762 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
35764 provides some functions to ease the task.
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35769 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
35770 you can open the outliner via
35772 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35776 \begin_inset space ~
35780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35782 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
35792 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
35793 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
35798 it will be more easier),
35803 -click on the entry and select
35805 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
35807 from the context menu.
35808 This will do just what it says:
35809 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35815 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
35816 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
35817 you can select from the context menu
35819 Index All Occurrences of this Word
35822 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
35823 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
35824 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
35825 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
35829 is the word before the index entry,
35834 will be considered as well,
35840 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
35842 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
35843 but only relevant occurrences!
35844 So as convenient as this function might seem,
35845 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
35847 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
35850 \begin_layout Subsection
35852 \begin_inset Index idx
35857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35859 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35876 name "subsec:Index-Program"
35883 \begin_layout Standard
35884 If the index processor,
35897 for that matter) for index generation;
35898 otherwise the program
35903 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35906 As a further option,
35907 you can select the rather new
35914 \begin_layout Itemize
35920 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
35921 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
35922 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
35924 \begin_inset space ~
35928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35930 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35936 how to manually fix this sorting,
35937 but this is very tedious work).
35940 \begin_layout Itemize
35941 The alternative program,
35947 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
35948 It can sort most languages correctly,
35949 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
35955 is no longer actively maintained,
35956 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
35962 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
35963 But if you have it available,
35964 it is almost always a better option than
35971 \begin_layout Itemize
35978 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
35979 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
35980 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
35981 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
35983 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
35984 The program is still in development,
35985 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
35986 But the program is definitely worth a try,
35991 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
35994 \begin_layout Standard
35995 All processors can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
35996 's preferences dialog,
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36004 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
36010 The available options are listed and explained in
36011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36013 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
36020 you can even specify arbitrary alternative programs to generate the index.
36023 \begin_layout Standard
36024 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
36025 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
36028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36029 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36033 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
36036 \begin_layout Subsection
36037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36039 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
36046 \begin_layout Standard
36047 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
36049 you might need to set up a separate
36050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36057 next to the standard index.
36059 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
36060 but there are packages that add this feature.
36067 \begin_inset Index idx
36072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36089 package to generate multiple indexes.
36090 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
36095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36096 If yours does not ship it,
36097 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
36100 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36108 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36110 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
36111 Please consult the package's manual for details.
36119 \begin_layout Standard
36120 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
36121 for the use of multiple indexes,
36124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36128 and select the option
36130 Use multiple Indexes
36137 already contains the standard index
36138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36146 To add further indexes,
36147 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
36151 input field and press the
36156 The new index now also appears in the list.
36158 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
36159 label color to the new index.
36162 \begin_layout Standard
36163 Once the document changes have been applied,
36164 you can find the new index list in
36166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36167 List/Contents/References
36173 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
36174 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
36175 but there are additional features:
36178 \begin_layout Itemize
36179 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
36180 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
36183 \begin_layout Itemize
36184 By right-clicking on an index,
36185 you can change its type.
36187 you can specify an index to be a
36193 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
36195 if you use a book class,
36196 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
36197 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
36200 \begin_layout Itemize
36205 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
36206 code in the name of the index.
36209 \begin_layout Section
36210 Nomenclature/Glossary
36211 \begin_inset Index idx
36216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36223 \begin_inset Index idx
36228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36230 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
36233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36247 name "sec:Nomenclature"
36254 \begin_layout Standard
36255 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
36258 \begin_layout Standard
36259 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
36260 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36266 \begin_inset Index idx
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36274 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36289 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36299 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36303 \begin_layout Standard
36304 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
36306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36312 \begin_inset space ~
36317 or the toolbar button
36320 arg "nomencl-insert"
36325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36336 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
36339 \begin_layout Standard
36340 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
36341 The first is the term or
36345 that you wish to define.
36350 of the term or symbol.
36353 \begin_layout Standard
36354 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36363 To use \SpecialChar TeX
36364 code for nomenclature entries the option
36368 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
36376 \begin_layout Subsection
36377 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
36378 \begin_inset Index idx
36383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36385 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36402 \begin_layout Standard
36403 If you have symbols in formulas,
36404 you have to define them in the
36408 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
36411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36415 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36424 \begin_inset Newline newline
36432 \begin_inset Newline newline
36438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36445 character starts/ends the formula.
36446 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36447 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
36448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36458 For capital Greek letters,
36459 start the command also with a capital letter,
36469 \begin_layout Standard
36470 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36471 syntax is given in section
36472 \begin_inset space ~
36476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36478 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36486 \begin_layout Standard
36490 \begin_inset space ~
36495 dialog to format the description text;
36496 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
36498 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
36499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36503 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36510 in this document is:
36511 \begin_inset Newline newline
36516 dummy entry for the character
36521 \begin_inset Newline newline
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36543 font use the command
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36575 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
36576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36580 \begin_inset space \space{}
36584 \begin_inset Newline newline
36600 \begin_inset Newline newline
36603 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
36604 This command will make the font of all symbols
36611 \begin_inset space ~
36619 \begin_layout Standard
36620 If the characters |
36621 \begin_inset space \space{}
36625 \begin_inset space \space{}
36629 \begin_inset space \space{}
36634 \begin_inset space \space{}
36638 \begin_inset space \space{}
36641 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
36642 code they need to be escaped by adding a percent character in front of them.
36643 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36644 LatexCommand nomenclature
36645 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
36646 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
36654 \begin_layout Subsection
36655 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
36656 \begin_inset Index idx
36661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36663 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36680 \begin_layout Standard
36681 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36682 -code of the symbol definition.
36683 This leads to undesired results when you,
36685 have symbols in formulas.
36686 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
36689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36690 LatexCommand nomenclature
36692 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
36700 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36704 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36705 LatexCommand nomenclature
36708 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
36714 They will be sorted by
36715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36741 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36744 will be sorted before the
36748 since the character
36749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36756 is considered in sorting.
36759 \begin_layout Standard
36760 To control the sort order,
36764 \begin_inset space ~
36769 field of the nomenclature dialog.
36770 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
36771 For the example given,
36776 in this field for the
36777 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36785 will be located before
36786 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36792 \begin_layout Standard
36793 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
36799 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36809 \begin_layout Subsection
36810 Nomenclature Options
36811 \begin_inset Index idx
36816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36818 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36835 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
36842 \begin_layout Standard
36847 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
36848 Here are some of its options;
36849 for more have a look at its documentation:
36852 \begin_layout Description
36853 refeq Appends the phrase
36854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36870 to every nomenclature entry,
36877 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
36880 \begin_layout Description
36881 refpage Appends the phrase
36882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36898 to every nomenclature entry,
36905 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
36908 \begin_layout Description
36909 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
36912 \begin_layout Standard
36913 To use one or more of the options,
36914 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
36916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36920 In this document the options
36928 \begin_layout Standard
36929 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
36935 \begin_layout Standard
36936 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
36940 field in the nomenclature dialog:
36943 \begin_layout Description
36953 \begin_layout Description
36956 nomrefpage Like the
36963 \begin_layout Description
36966 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
36975 \begin_layout Description
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36985 \begin_inset space ~
36990 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
36993 \begin_layout Standard
36995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37002 are automatically translated for most document languages.
37004 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37017 \begin_inset Newline newline
37023 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37043 \begin_inset Newline newline
37050 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37051 \begin_inset Newline newline
37057 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37061 \begin_inset space ~
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
37081 assure that you use
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37089 in the document settings under
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37108 \begin_inset Newline newline
37112 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37129 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
37131 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
37132 \begin_inset Newline newline
37139 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37140 \begin_inset Newline newline
37144 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37161 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
37166 \begin_layout Subsection
37167 Printing the Nomenclature
37168 \begin_inset Index idx
37173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37175 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37192 \begin_layout Standard
37193 To print the nomenclature,
37196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37197 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37213 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
37214 By right-clicking on it,
37215 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
37216 You can choose between these settings:
37219 \begin_layout Description
37220 Default a space of 1
37221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37227 \begin_layout Description
37229 \begin_inset space ~
37233 \begin_inset space ~
37236 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
37239 \begin_layout Description
37240 Custom custom space
37243 \begin_layout Standard
37244 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
37245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37253 If you are not happy with the name,
37254 you can change it by redefining the command
37262 in order to change the name to
37267 add the following line to the preamble:
37270 \begin_layout Standard
37283 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 When you are using another document language than English,
37289 \begin_inset Newline newline
37305 where *** is the name of the language used.
37308 \begin_layout Subsection
37309 Nomenclature Program
37310 \begin_inset Index idx
37315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37317 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37334 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
37341 \begin_layout Standard
37348 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
37350 to generate the nomenclature.
37352 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
37358 \begin_inset space ~
37362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37364 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
37370 The available options are listed and explained in
37371 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37373 key "nomencl,makeindex"
37381 \begin_layout Section
37383 \begin_inset Index idx
37388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37395 \begin_inset Index idx
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37419 name "sec:Branches"
37426 \begin_layout Standard
37427 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
37428 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
37429 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
37432 \begin_layout Standard
37433 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
37434 allows you to put text into branches.
37435 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
37436 To create a branch,
37437 either select the menu
37439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37440 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
37443 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
37445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37453 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
37454 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
37455 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
37456 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
37458 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
37459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37474 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
37475 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
37478 \begin_layout Standard
37479 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
37480 These boxes are inserted via the menu
37482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37485 where you can choose a branch.
37486 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
37489 \begin_layout Standard
37490 Here is an example,
37491 where only the question text appears,
37492 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
37495 \begin_layout Standard
37496 \begin_inset Branch Question
37500 \begin_layout Standard
37506 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
37514 \begin_layout Standard
37515 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37519 \begin_layout Standard
37525 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
37533 \begin_layout Standard
37540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37545 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
37546 Consider for example a file
37547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37554 which has the above branches.
37556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37564 the PDF export file would be called
37565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37588 branch were inactive,
37590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37627 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
37628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37631 if both branches were active.
37632 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
37633 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37639 \begin_layout Standard
37640 It is also possible to invert just some branch insets,
37641 whose content is output just in case the branch is
37645 activated (they are marked with ~ before the name).
37646 Such insets make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
37647 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
37648 right-click on the inset button and choose
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37659 \begin_layout Standard
37660 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37664 \begin_layout Standard
37671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37678 branch is deactivated.
37684 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37690 \begin_layout Standard
37691 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
37692 like inside equations,
37693 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
37694 definitions for each branch.
37695 For example you can define for the question branch
37699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37700 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37703 \begin_inset space ~
37707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37709 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
37722 \begin_layout Standard
37732 \begin_layout Standard
37742 \begin_layout Standard
37743 and for the answer branch
37746 \begin_layout Standard
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 \begin_inset Branch Question
37771 \begin_layout Standard
37775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37808 \begin_layout Standard
37812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37840 \begin_layout Standard
37841 Now it is possible to use the
37845 question{\SpecialChar ldots
37852 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
37855 commands to obtain conditional output.
37856 Here is an example formula where only the
37863 \begin_inset Formula
37865 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
37873 \begin_layout Standard
37875 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
37883 \begin_layout Standard
37884 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
37885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37889 \begin_inset space \space{}
37892 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
37894 For this advanced usage,
37902 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37907 \begin_layout Standard
37908 In case you often need to keep all branches of a given name in sync as far as their open/close status is concerned,
37909 you can use the \SpecialChar LyX
37914 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
37915 You can bind it to a keyboard shortcut or add it to a user-defined context menu for branch insets.
37918 \begin_layout Section
37920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37922 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
37927 \begin_inset Index idx
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 \begin_layout Standard
37944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37945 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37948 allows you to set up specifics of your document's PDF output.
37949 Most of these specifics are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37955 \begin_inset Index idx
37960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37963 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37977 which you need to enable by clicking
37979 Use Hyperref Support
37981 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
37982 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
37984 Customize Hyperref Options
37987 Among other things,
37988 hyperref hyperlinks all URLs and cross-references in the PDF output.
37989 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on an URL,
37990 a table of contents entry or on a reference to open a website or to move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
37992 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
37993 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
37996 \begin_layout Standard
37997 The header information in the dialog tab
38001 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
38002 Many programs are able to extract this information,
38004 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
38005 This is very useful to sort,
38006 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38014 \begin_inset space ~
38020 hyperref tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
38024 \begin_inset space ~
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38032 \begin_inset space ~
38037 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
38038 which is useful for presentations.
38041 \begin_layout Standard
38046 you can customize the look of such links,
38047 and you can specify if and which bibliographical backreferences are created.
38052 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
38053 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited.
38057 \begin_inset space ~
38061 \begin_inset space ~
38065 \begin_inset space ~
38070 option allows long links to be split;
38074 \begin_inset space ~
38078 \begin_inset space ~
38082 \begin_inset space ~
38090 \begin_inset space ~
38095 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
38099 \begin_inset space ~
38104 colors the different links.
38105 The default colors are:
38108 \begin_layout Labeling
38109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38114 for hyperlinks and URLs
38117 \begin_layout Labeling
38118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38126 \begin_layout Labeling
38127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38135 \begin_layout Standard
38136 but you can change these in the tab
38142 in this document they were changed with these additional options added to
38149 \begin_layout Quote
38158 \begin_layout Standard
38163 you can specify if PDF bookmarks (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader) should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
38164 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
38169 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
38174 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
38176 \begin_inset space ~
38179 2 will display all sections and subsections,
38181 \begin_inset space ~
38184 1 will only display the sections (collapsing the rest).
38187 \begin_layout Standard
38192 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
38193 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38200 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
38201 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
38202 \begin_inset Flex Code
38205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 not via the package options.
38215 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
38216 If you need to use one of those options,
38217 you can set them by adding
38220 \begin_layout Quote
38223 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option2
38226 \begin_layout Standard
38229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38230 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38233 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
38236 \begin_layout Standard
38241 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
38243 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
38244 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
38245 input is simply ignored).
38246 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
38252 At the point of writing this,
38253 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
38255 documentmetadata-support.pdf
38258 but it is expected that in the future,
38259 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
38262 \begin_layout Section
38264 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38268 name "sec:TeX-Code"
38275 \begin_layout Subsection
38278 \begin_inset Index idx
38283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38293 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38300 \begin_layout Standard
38301 As \SpecialChar LyX
38302 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
38304 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
38305 commands and constructs,
38308 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
38309 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
38310 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38311 -package for every problem,
38312 though \SpecialChar LyX
38313 cannot support all packages and their commands.
38316 \begin_layout Standard
38318 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
38319 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
38320 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
38323 Code box is created by the menu
38325 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38327 \begin_inset space ~
38332 or by the toolbar button
38345 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38353 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
38355 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
38358 if you want to draw a frame around a word
38362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38363 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
38368 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38376 you can write the command part
38382 in a \SpecialChar TeX
38383 Code box before the word and the closing brace
38387 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
38388 Code box behind the word.
38389 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
38390 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38394 \begin_inset Graphics
38395 filename clipart/ERT.png
38403 \begin_layout Standard
38407 \begin_layout Standard
38408 This is a line with a
38412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 \begin_layout Standard
38436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38445 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
38446 -commands without parameters,
38447 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
38448 know that the command is finished.
38456 \begin_layout Subsection
38457 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38459 \begin_inset Argument 1
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
38470 \begin_inset Index idx
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38485 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38492 \begin_layout Standard
38493 When you write larger documents or books,
38494 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38495 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
38496 uses in the background.
38497 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
38498 is based on commands,
38500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38508 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
38510 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
38511 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
38512 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
38513 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
38516 \begin_layout Standard
38517 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
38519 As mentioned above,
38520 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38522 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38535 \begin_layout Standard
38536 As result you find that the package
38541 \begin_inset Index idx
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38549 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
38567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38570 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38574 \begin_inset space ~
38582 \begin_layout Standard
38587 usepackage[options]{package name}
38590 \begin_layout Standard
38591 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
38592 commands begin with a backslash,
38593 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
38594 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
38597 \begin_layout Standard
38598 In your case the package name is
38603 After a look in the documentation of the package,
38604 you know that the option
38608 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
38609 So you add the command
38612 \begin_layout Standard
38617 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
38620 \begin_layout Standard
38621 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
38625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38626 For more commands provided by the
38631 have a look at its documentation,
38633 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38648 \begin_layout Standard
38649 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
38650 For example if you use a
38655 you don't need the package
38660 you can instead write
38663 \begin_layout Standard
38668 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
38673 \begin_layout Standard
38674 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
38675 So if you plan to write a large document,
38676 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
38683 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
38686 \begin_layout Standard
38687 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
38688 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
38689 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38691 use the \SpecialChar TeX
38692 Code box as described in the previous section.
38695 \begin_layout Standard
38696 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
38698 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38702 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
38710 \begin_layout Standard
38711 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
38717 \begin_layout Standard
38721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38731 \begin_inset Note Note
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
38743 \begin_layout Left Header
38744 \begin_inset Argument 1
38747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38767 \begin_inset Note Note
38770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 defines the header line as described below
38779 \begin_layout Center Header
38780 \begin_inset Argument 1
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38792 \begin_layout Right Header
38793 \begin_inset Argument 1
38796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 \begin_layout Left Footer
38818 \begin_inset Argument 1
38821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38842 \begin_layout Center Footer
38843 \begin_inset Argument 1
38846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38858 \begin_inset Newline newline
38862 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
38868 \begin_layout Right Footer
38869 \begin_inset Argument 1
38872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38894 \begin_layout Section
38895 Customized Page Headers and Footers
38896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38898 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
38903 \begin_inset Index idx
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38910 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38925 \begin_inset Index idx
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38939 \begin_layout Standard
38940 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
38941 you need to set the
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38967 As a second step add in the menu
38969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38970 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38979 Custom Header/Footerlines
38982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38986 This module offers the following 6
38987 \begin_inset space ~
38993 \begin_layout Description
38995 \begin_inset space ~
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39003 \begin_inset space ~
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39017 \begin_layout Description
39019 \begin_inset space ~
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39031 \begin_inset space ~
39035 \begin_inset space ~
39041 \begin_layout Standard
39042 for the different positions in the header/footer.
39043 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
39046 \begin_layout Standard
39048 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
39049 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39057 reference "fig:Page-layout"
39062 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
39065 \begin_layout Standard
39066 \begin_inset Float figure
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 \begin_inset Tabular
39077 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
39078 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
39079 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39080 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39081 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39083 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39101 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39141 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39145 The normal text on the page goes here.
39146 The running header is above the text,
39147 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
39148 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
39149 title of the chapter,
39150 company logo but you can use almost anything,
39156 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39165 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39194 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
39217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39223 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39241 \begin_inset Caption Standard
39243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39246 name "fig:Page-layout"
39250 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
39263 \begin_layout Standard
39264 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39273 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
39276 \begin_inset space ~
39281 is set to “Default”.
39282 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
39290 \begin_layout Subsection
39294 \begin_layout Standard
39295 To define your header line,
39296 add all three header environments.
39297 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
39298 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
39299 For single-sided documents,
39300 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
39301 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
39302 nothing appears in the output.
39303 Defining the footer line works similarly.
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39307 For the definition,
39308 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39309 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
39312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39314 \begin_inset space ~
39322 \begin_layout Description
39325 thepage prints the current page number
39328 \begin_layout Description
39331 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
39334 \begin_layout Description
39337 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
39340 \begin_layout Description
39343 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
39344 If the document has chapters,
39345 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
39347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39351 \begin_inset Quotes prd
39354 because it usually goes in a left header.
39357 \begin_layout Description
39360 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
39361 If the document has chapters,
39362 it prints the current section number and title instead.
39363 It is normally used in the right header.
39366 \begin_layout Subsection
39367 Default header/footer
39370 \begin_layout Standard
39371 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
39372 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
39373 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
39374 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
39375 but leave it blank.
39377 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
39381 \begin_inset space ~
39389 \begin_layout Subsection
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39394 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
39395 Some pages are different.
39396 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
39397 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
39398 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
39399 but that is normal.
39400 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
39403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39404 Header and footer decoration line
39407 \begin_layout Standard
39410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39413 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
39414 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
39426 in the following way:
39429 \begin_layout Standard
39436 headrulewidth}{thickness}
39439 \begin_layout Standard
39440 where thickness is a size in standard units like
39453 If you don't want a line,
39454 set the thickness to 0
39455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39461 \begin_layout Standard
39462 The lines can also be colored,
39463 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
39465 If you really need this,
39466 have a look at the Internet or in section
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39471 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39482 Several header/footer lines
39485 \begin_layout Standard
39486 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
39487 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
39489 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
39490 To expand the height,
39491 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39507 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39509 \begin_inset space ~
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39524 headheight}{height}
39527 \begin_layout Standard
39532 is a size in standard units (e.
39533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39537 \begin_inset space \space{}
39545 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
39546 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
39547 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39548 logfile with the menu
39550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39552 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_inset space ~
39565 to see if you can find a warning about the package
39570 \begin_inset Index idx
39575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39578 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39593 If there is such a warning,
39594 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
39597 \begin_layout Subsection
39601 \begin_layout Standard
39602 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
39603 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
39604 This example consists of the following definition:
39607 \begin_layout Description
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39619 empty optional argument
39622 \begin_layout Description
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39628 empty optional argument
39631 \begin_layout Description
39633 \begin_inset space ~
39643 in the optional argument
39646 \begin_layout Description
39648 \begin_inset space ~
39658 in the optional argument
39661 \begin_layout Description
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39681 \begin_inset Newline newline
39685 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
39689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39692 in the optional argument
39695 \begin_layout Description
39697 \begin_inset space ~
39707 empty optional argument
39710 \begin_layout Description
39713 headrulewidth set to 2
39714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39720 \begin_layout Standard
39721 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
39723 For more specialized features,
39726 see the manual of the
39732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39742 \begin_layout Standard
39743 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
39749 \begin_layout Standard
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39757 pagestyle{headings}
39763 \begin_inset Note Note
39766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39767 switches back to page style with the default headings
39775 \begin_layout Section
39776 Previewing Snippets of your Document
39777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39779 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39784 \begin_inset Index idx
39789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39796 \begin_inset Index idx
39801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39803 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39820 \begin_layout Standard
39822 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
39825 \begin_layout Subsection
39829 \begin_layout Standard
39830 To get previews working,
39831 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39837 \begin_inset Index idx
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39859 (on some systems named simply
39864 If it is not already installed,
39865 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39868 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39875 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39877 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
39886 for \SpecialChar LyX
39887 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39888 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
39892 \begin_layout Subsection
39896 \begin_layout Standard
39897 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
39898 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
39900 activate the option
39903 \begin_inset space ~
39910 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39920 \begin_inset space ~
39923 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
39930 \begin_inset space ~
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39948 is the multiplication factor for the size.
39951 \begin_layout Standard
39952 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
39957 \begin_inset space ~
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39973 \begin_layout Standard
39974 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
39975 and when you finish editing an inset.
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39979 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39988 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39997 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
40005 \begin_layout Subsection
40006 Selected document parts
40009 \begin_layout Standard
40010 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
40011 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
40012 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40015 insert a preview inset via the menu
40017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40021 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
40022 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
40023 If you click on the preview,
40024 you can edit the previewed stuff.
40027 \begin_layout Standard
40029 To create rotated boxes,
40030 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40037 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40049 is explained in section
40051 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40066 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
40067 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
40068 the final rotated boxes,
40069 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
40070 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
40071 Here is the result:
40074 \begin_layout Standard
40075 \begin_inset Preview
40077 \begin_layout Standard
40082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40086 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
40092 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
40102 height_special "totalheight"
40107 backgroundcolor "none"
40110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40135 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
40141 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
40148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40163 \begin_layout Standard
40164 Previewing works also for colors.
40165 In this example a special framed,
40166 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40184 is explained in section
40191 \begin_inset space ~
40204 \begin_layout Standard
40205 \begin_inset Preview
40207 \begin_layout Standard
40211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40230 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
40235 This is text within a colored,
40240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40255 \begin_layout Standard
40256 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
40262 \begin_layout Standard
40263 If \SpecialChar LyX
40264 does not show a preview,
40265 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
40266 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40267 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
40269 If \SpecialChar LyX
40270 cannot create a preview,
40271 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40273 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
40274 Code and don't know if it is correct,
40275 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
40278 \begin_layout Subsection
40283 \begin_layout Standard
40284 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40285 source of the whole document or parts of it.
40288 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
40290 \begin_inset space ~
40295 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40297 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
40298 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
40300 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
40301 To view the whole document as source,
40302 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
40308 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
40310 but note that if you have several documents open,
40311 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
40313 not just the one which is open at the time.
40316 \begin_layout Section
40317 Advanced Find and Replace
40318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40320 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40325 \begin_inset Index idx
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40337 \begin_inset Index idx
40342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40351 \begin_layout Subsection
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40356 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
40357 allows for searching of complex,
40358 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
40360 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
40361 The key-features are:
40364 \begin_layout Itemize
40365 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
40366 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
40367 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
40368 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
40371 \begin_layout Itemize
40372 Search may be format-insensitive,
40373 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
40376 and even mathematics),
40377 or it may be format-sensitive,
40380 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
40383 \begin_layout Itemize
40384 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
40385 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
40388 \begin_layout Itemize
40389 Search may be widened to a specific
40395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40399 \begin_inset space ~
40402 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
40403 all the open files,
40404 or all the manuals available from the
40411 \begin_layout Itemize
40412 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
40413 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
40414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40418 \begin_inset space ~
40423 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
40426 \begin_layout Subsection
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40431 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
40433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40446 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
40449 ) or the toolbar button
40452 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
40458 Advanced Find and Replace
40463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40467 \begin_layout Standard
40473 mini-editor a simple word,
40474 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
40477 \begin_inset space ~
40482 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
40485 arg "paragraph-break"
40489 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
40491 bold or normal face,
40492 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
40496 arg "paragraph-break"
40499 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
40503 searches backwards.
40506 \begin_layout Standard
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40515 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40528 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
40531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40532 Searching for mathematics
40535 \begin_layout Standard
40536 Mathematical formulas,
40538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
40541 or something more complex like
40542 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
40546 may be searched for by typing them in the
40551 When searching for a formula,
40552 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
40553 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
40554 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
40560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40564 \begin_layout Standard
40565 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
40566 This is done by switching to the
40570 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
40583 \begin_layout Itemize
40584 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
40587 \begin_layout Itemize
40588 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
40589 and within the same text style only.
40592 \begin_layout Itemize
40593 a normal word in a section heading,
40594 and searching for it,
40595 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
40597 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
40598 in addition to a section style,
40599 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
40602 \begin_layout Itemize
40603 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
40606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40610 \begin_layout Standard
40611 The entries made in the
40615 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40624 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
40629 button or alternatively press
40632 arg "paragraph-break"
40639 while the cursor is in the
40642 \begin_inset space ~
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40651 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
40653 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
40656 \begin_layout Itemize
40657 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
40658 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
40659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40666 with its typewriter version
40667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40681 \begin_layout Itemize
40682 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
40683 for example replacing occurrences of
40684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40688 \begin_inset Formula $R$
40692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40700 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
40704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40707 (you may want to enable the
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40723 options and disable the
40732 in order to avoid replacing all
40733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40740 letters occurring in normal text),
40742 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
40746 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
40751 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
40755 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
40761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40765 \begin_layout Standard
40766 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
40770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
40773 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40775 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
40785 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
40790 This is done with the context menu
40792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40793 Insert Regular Expression
40795 while the cursor is in the
40800 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
40804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40805 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
40808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40815 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
40817 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
40823 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
40824 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
40825 Examples of using such a feature may be:
40828 \begin_layout Enumerate
40829 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
40835 editor the fraction
40836 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
40840 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40843 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
40846 \begin_layout Enumerate
40847 Searching for all text with a given style:
40851 Adhere to search string formatting of
40857 button in this section pressed,
40861 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40866 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
40867 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
40870 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40873 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
40874 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
40875 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
40879 \begin_layout Description
40880 Language Allows searching for text in specific language (relevant here is,
40881 as with the other options,
40882 the setting of the search string)
40885 \begin_layout Description
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40890 color colored text like cyan,
40895 \begin_layout Description
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40905 \begin_layout Description
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_layout Description
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40925 \begin_layout Description
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40936 \begin_layout Description
40937 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
40942 \begin_layout Description
40949 \begin_layout Description
40950 Strike-through Single,
40954 \begin_layout Description
40955 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
40958 \begin_layout Description
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40974 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
40975 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
40976 \begin_inset Formula $()$
40980 and referring back to them through
40981 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
40986 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
40992 try searching with the regexp
40993 \begin_inset Newline newline
41007 \begin_inset Newline newline
41010 in order to find word repetitions,
41014 \begin_layout Standard
41015 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) fully implemented.
41018 \begin_layout Standard
41019 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41028 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
41029 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
41030 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41036 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
41039 always refers to the first occurrence of
41040 \begin_inset Formula $()$
41043 in all entered regexps.
41051 \begin_layout Section
41053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41055 name "sec:Spellchecking"
41060 \begin_inset Index idx
41065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41074 \begin_layout Standard
41076 has a built-in spell checker.
41079 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41087 key or the toolbar button
41090 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41093 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
41094 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
41095 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
41096 Whenever an unknown word is found,
41097 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
41098 In the spellchecker sidebar,
41099 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
41100 if any could be found.
41101 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
41106 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
41107 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
41110 \begin_layout Standard
41112 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
41114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41118 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
41120 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
41121 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41132 arg "dialog-show character"
41135 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
41137 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
41140 \begin_layout Standard
41141 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
41142 can be downloaded from here:
41143 \begin_inset Newline newline
41147 \begin_inset Flex URL
41150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41152 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
41158 \begin_inset Newline newline
41161 You should download 2
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41165 files for each language (use
41169 link at the end of the opened webpage).
41170 To install a dictionary on Windows,
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41175 files into \SpecialChar LyX
41176 's installation subfolder
41184 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41186 \begin_inset Newline newline
41189 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
41190 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
41191 but in most cases these are
41211 is the language code.
41214 \begin_layout Subsection
41218 \begin_layout Standard
41221 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41222 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41227 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41230 you can set the following things:
41233 \begin_layout Description
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41238 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
41239 should use for spell checking.
41240 Depending on your platform,
41251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41252 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
41253 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41271 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
41274 \begin_layout Description
41276 \begin_inset space ~
41279 language If this field is not empty,
41281 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
41282 no matter what the document language is.
41285 \begin_layout Description
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41290 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
41292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41296 \begin_inset space \space{}
41300 This should normally not be needed.
41303 \begin_layout Description
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41312 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
41313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41323 \begin_layout Description
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41328 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
41329 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
41330 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
41331 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
41332 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
41335 \begin_layout Description
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41348 comments If enabled,
41349 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
41352 \begin_layout Section
41354 \begin_inset Index idx
41359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41368 name "sec:Thesaurus"
41375 \begin_layout Standard
41377 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
41378 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
41379 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
41387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41388 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41390 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
41401 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
41405 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
41406 which are available for many languages.
41409 \begin_layout Standard
41410 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
41414 \begin_layout Subsection
41415 Setting up the thesaurus
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41427 thesauri consist of two files per language:
41428 A file with the suffix
41432 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
41437 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
41438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41451 the US English files are named:
41454 \begin_layout Itemize
41458 \begin_layout Itemize
41462 \begin_layout Standard
41471 and its thesaurus installed,
41472 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
41475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41476 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41477 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41484 ) to the path where they are installed.
41488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41490 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
41491 typical locations are
41498 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
41503 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
41508 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
41512 dictionaries are to be found at
41518 LibreOffice-<Version>
41526 the default location is
41528 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
41529 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41530 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
41531 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
41532 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41533 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41542 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
41543 installation process,
41544 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41548 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
41549 updated thesaurus dictionaries,
41550 you can download them from here:
41551 \begin_inset Newline newline
41555 \begin_inset Flex URL
41558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
41568 \begin_layout Standard
41569 To install a new dictionary,
41570 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
41572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41573 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41574 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41581 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41583 If this path is not defined yet,
41584 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
41588 \begin_layout Standard
41590 you can also install new dictionaries via
41592 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41597 via your package manager (look for
41603 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
41607 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
41608 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
41610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41616 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41617 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41618 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41620 \begin_inset space ~
41625 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
41628 \begin_layout Subsection
41629 Using the thesaurus
41632 \begin_layout Standard
41633 To start the thesaurus,
41636 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41639 or the toolbar button
41642 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41645 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
41646 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
41647 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
41649 for some languages (such as English),
41650 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
41651 but also generic terms (such as
41660 related terms (such as
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41686 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
41696 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
41699 \begin_layout Standard
41700 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
41701 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
41702 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
41705 \begin_layout Standard
41706 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
41712 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
41714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41718 \begin_inset space \space{}
41721 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
41722 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
41723 infinitive for verbs).
41725 looking up the word form
41730 while results are shown for the word form
41735 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
41736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41740 \begin_inset space \space{}
41752 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
41753 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
41754 thus the ending remains).
41757 \begin_layout Section
41759 \begin_inset Index idx
41764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41771 \begin_inset Index idx
41776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41778 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41795 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
41802 \begin_layout Standard
41803 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
41804 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
41805 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
41807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41812 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_layout Standard
41823 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
41838 The color depends on the author that made the change.
41839 You can change the color in
41841 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41842 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41853 \SpecialChar menuseparator
41859 \begin_inset Index idx
41864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41880 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
41881 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
41882 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
41885 arg "changes-merge"
41891 \begin_layout Standard
41892 When change tracking is activated,
41893 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
41895 \begin_inset Index idx
41900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 \begin_layout Standard
41920 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41926 \begin_layout Standard
41927 \begin_inset Graphics
41928 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
41936 \begin_layout Standard
41937 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41943 \begin_layout Standard
41944 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
41947 \begin_layout Standard
41948 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41954 \begin_layout Standard
41955 \begin_inset Tabular
41956 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
41957 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41958 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41959 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41969 arg "changes-track"
41977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41988 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
41990 \begin_inset space ~
41999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42008 arg "changes-output"
42016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42024 \begin_inset space ~
42027 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42029 \begin_inset space ~
42033 \begin_inset space ~
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42067 Jumps to the next change
42073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42082 arg "change-accept"
42090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42101 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42103 \begin_inset space ~
42112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42121 arg "change-reject"
42129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42137 \begin_inset space ~
42140 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42142 \begin_inset space ~
42151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42160 arg "changes-merge"
42168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42176 \begin_inset space ~
42179 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42181 \begin_inset space ~
42190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42199 arg "all-changes-accept"
42207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42218 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42242 arg "all-changes-reject"
42250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42258 \begin_inset space ~
42261 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42263 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \begin_inset space ~
42276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42300 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42302 \begin_inset space ~
42311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42334 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42336 \begin_inset space ~
42352 \begin_layout Standard
42353 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42359 \begin_layout Standard
42360 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
42361 especially no format changes like from
42380 \begin_layout Standard
42381 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
42383 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
42384 When you merge changes,
42385 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
42386 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
42387 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
42388 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42392 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
42395 \begin_layout Section
42396 Comparison of Documents
42397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42399 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42404 \begin_inset Index idx
42409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42410 Comparison of documents
42418 \begin_layout Standard
42419 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
42422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42426 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
42427 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
42428 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
42429 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42436 \begin_inset space ~
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42449 \begin_inset space ~
42453 \begin_inset space ~
42457 \begin_inset space ~
42461 \begin_inset space ~
42465 \begin_inset space ~
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42474 enables the change tracking option
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42485 \begin_inset space ~
42490 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
42493 \begin_layout Section
42494 International Support
42495 \begin_inset Index idx
42500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42501 International support
42509 \begin_layout Standard
42510 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
42511 with any language you want.
42512 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
42515 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42517 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
42525 \begin_layout Standard
42528 also supports phonetic symbols,
42530 \begin_inset space ~
42534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42536 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
42544 \begin_layout Subsection
42546 \begin_inset Index idx
42551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42553 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42568 \begin_inset Index idx
42573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42575 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42590 \begin_inset Index idx
42595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42597 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 \begin_layout Standard
42617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42618 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42621 dialog lets you set
42624 the quote style and character encoding
42629 \begin_layout Standard
42634 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42644 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
42645 For details about the different encoding options see section
42646 \begin_inset space ~
42650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42652 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42660 \begin_layout Subsection
42661 Keyboard mapping configuration
42662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42664 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
42671 \begin_layout Standard
42672 If you have for example a U.
42673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42676 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
42677 you can use an alternate keymap.
42679 if you want to write in Italian,
42680 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
42681 to use an Italian keymap.
42684 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42685 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42686 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
42689 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42697 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
42703 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
42706 \begin_layout Standard
42708 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
42712 normally write in Italian on a U.
42713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42716 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
42718 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
42719 This and many other customizations are explained in the
42726 \begin_layout Chapter
42729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42731 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
42738 \begin_layout Standard
42739 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
42740 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
42743 \begin_layout Section
42745 \begin_inset Index idx
42750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42752 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 \begin_layout Standard
42774 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
42777 \begin_layout Subsection
42781 \begin_layout Standard
42782 Creates a new document.
42785 \begin_layout Subsection
42789 \begin_layout Standard
42790 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
42791 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
42792 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
42794 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
42797 \begin_layout Subsection
42801 \begin_layout Standard
42805 \begin_layout Subsection
42809 \begin_layout Standard
42810 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
42811 Click there on a file to open it.
42814 \begin_layout Subsection
42818 \begin_layout Standard
42819 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
42823 \begin_layout Subsection
42827 \begin_layout Standard
42828 Closes the current document.
42831 \begin_layout Subsection
42835 \begin_layout Standard
42836 Closes all opened documents.
42839 \begin_layout Subsection
42843 \begin_layout Standard
42844 Saves the actual document.
42847 \begin_layout Subsection
42851 \begin_layout Standard
42852 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
42855 \begin_layout Subsection
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42860 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
42863 \begin_layout Subsection
42867 \begin_layout Standard
42868 Saves all opened documents.
42871 \begin_layout Subsection
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42876 Reloads the actual document from disk.
42879 \begin_layout Subsection
42883 \begin_layout Standard
42884 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
42885 It is described in the section
42887 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
42892 Additional Features
42897 \begin_layout Subsection
42901 \begin_layout Standard
42902 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
42908 plain text files and comma separated,
42909 table-like text files (CSV).
42910 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
42914 \begin_layout Standard
42915 When using the menu entry
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42924 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
42925 when using the menu entry
42928 \begin_inset space ~
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42936 \begin_inset space ~
42942 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
42943 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
42946 \begin_layout Subsection
42948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42950 name "subsec:Export"
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42958 You can export your document to various file formats.
42959 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
42961 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
42962 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
42963 during its configuration.
42966 \begin_layout Standard
42967 Here is a list of all available entries;
42968 some of them are explained in detail in section
42969 \begin_inset space ~
42973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42975 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
42983 \begin_layout Description
42989 \begin_inset space ~
42992 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
42994 \begin_inset space ~
42997 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
42998 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
42999 \begin_inset Newline newline
43002 Since \SpecialChar LyX
43003 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
43007 \begin_layout Description
43008 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
43013 \begin_layout Description
43015 \begin_inset space ~
43018 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
43023 \begin_layout Description
43024 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
43025 's native DVI-format.
43026 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
43028 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
43035 \begin_layout Description
43036 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
43039 \begin_layout Description
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43048 ) DVI-format using the program
43050 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43054 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
43059 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43068 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
43076 \begin_layout Description
43078 \begin_inset space ~
43081 (cropped) the same as
43085 but with cropped page margins.
43088 \begin_layout Description
43090 \begin_inset space ~
43093 Dot text file with code in the programming language
43097 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
43102 \begin_layout Description
43107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43116 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
43124 \begin_layout Description
43126 \begin_inset space ~
43130 \begin_inset space ~
43133 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
43138 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
43145 \begin_layout Description
43149 \begin_inset space ~
43158 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43159 source that is compilable with the program
43161 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43165 \begin_layout Description
43169 \begin_inset space ~
43174 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43176 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
43186 \begin_layout Description
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43195 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43197 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
43198 only this format is readable by the
43205 \begin_layout Description
43209 \begin_inset space ~
43218 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43219 source that is compilable with the program
43225 \begin_layout Description
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43231 \begin_inset space ~
43238 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43239 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
43244 \begin_layout Description
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43249 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
43250 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
43252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43256 \begin_inset space \space{}
43261 \begin_inset space ~
43266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43281 represent the version number)
43284 \begin_layout Description
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43290 \begin_inset space ~
43293 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
43295 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43300 \begin_layout Description
43301 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
43302 's internal XHTML engine
43305 \begin_layout Description
43307 \begin_inset space ~
43311 \begin_inset space ~
43315 \begin_inset space ~
43319 \begin_inset space ~
43322 XML Office Open XML file,
43328 For the conversion the program
43337 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43340 \begin_layout Description
43341 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
43346 \begin_layout Description
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43351 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
43361 For the conversion the program
43370 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43373 \begin_layout Description
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43378 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
43379 For the conversion the program
43388 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43391 \begin_layout Description
43393 \begin_inset space ~
43396 (cropped) the same as
43399 \begin_inset space ~
43404 but with cropped page margins
43407 \begin_layout Description
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43416 PDF-format using the program
43421 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43424 \begin_layout Description
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43445 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
43446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43450 \begin_inset space \space{}
43453 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
43456 \begin_layout Description
43460 \begin_inset space ~
43465 PDF-format using the program
43467 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43471 produces PDF-files directly
43474 \begin_layout Description
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43483 PDF-format using the program
43488 produces PDF-files directly
43491 \begin_layout Description
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43500 PDF-format using the program
43505 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43508 \begin_layout Description
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43517 PDF-format using the program
43523 produces PDF-files directly
43526 \begin_layout Description
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_layout Description
43542 \begin_inset space ~
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43552 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
43557 \begin_layout Description
43562 PostScript format using the program
43571 options see section
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43578 reference "subsec:General-output"
43586 \begin_layout Description
43587 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43588 source and also code in the statistical programming language
43601 it is possible to use
43605 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43610 If one of the menu entries
43618 \begin_inset space ~
43628 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43630 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43639 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43645 \begin_inset Index idx
43650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43651 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43660 \begin_layout Subsection
43664 \begin_layout Standard
43665 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43674 reference "sec:Paths"
43680 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
43689 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
43690 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
43691 's preferences as described in section
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43698 reference "subsec:Converters"
43706 \begin_layout Subsection
43707 New and Close Window
43710 \begin_layout Standard
43711 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43715 \begin_layout Subsection
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
43723 \begin_layout Section
43725 \begin_inset Index idx
43730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43732 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43749 \begin_layout Subsection
43753 \begin_layout Standard
43754 Described in section
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43761 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
43769 \begin_layout Subsection
43777 \begin_layout Standard
43778 Described in section
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43785 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43793 \begin_layout Subsection
43797 \begin_layout Standard
43798 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
43799 If the cursor is outside an inset,
43800 the whole document will be selected.
43803 \begin_layout Subsection
43807 \begin_layout Standard
43808 Selects the whole document.
43811 \begin_layout Subsection
43812 Find & Replace (Quick)
43815 \begin_layout Standard
43816 Described in section
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43823 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43831 \begin_layout Subsection
43832 Find & Replace (Advanced)
43835 \begin_layout Standard
43836 Described in section
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43843 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
43851 \begin_layout Subsection
43852 Move Paragraph Up/Down
43855 \begin_layout Standard
43856 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
43859 \begin_layout Subsection
43861 \begin_inset Index idx
43866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43868 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43885 \begin_layout Standard
43886 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
43887 line spacing and label width.
43888 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
43891 \begin_layout Standard
43892 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
43898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43899 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43909 \begin_layout Subsection
43913 \begin_layout Standard
43914 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
43918 \begin_layout Enumerate
43919 Customize text properties by means of the
43925 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
43929 this is described in section
43930 \begin_inset space ~
43934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43936 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
43944 \begin_layout Enumerate
43945 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
43947 Apply last settings
43950 \begin_layout Enumerate
43951 Change the casing of selected text (
43968 \begin_layout Subsection
43972 \begin_layout Standard
43973 This sub-menu only appears if the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
43999 \begin_inset space ~
44003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44005 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
44013 \begin_layout Subsection
44014 Table and Rows & Columns
44017 \begin_layout Standard
44018 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
44019 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
44020 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
44023 \begin_layout Subsection
44027 \begin_layout Standard
44028 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
44029 It will dissolve this inset.
44030 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
44033 \begin_layout Subsection
44037 \begin_layout Standard
44038 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
44039 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
44042 \begin_layout Subsection
44043 Increase/Decrease List Depth
44046 \begin_layout Standard
44047 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
44048 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
44049 \begin_inset space ~
44053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44055 reference "sec:Nesting"
44061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44063 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44071 \begin_layout Section
44073 \begin_inset Index idx
44078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44097 \begin_layout Standard
44098 At the bottom of the
44102 menu the opened documents are listed.
44105 \begin_layout Subsection
44106 Open/Close all Insets
44109 \begin_layout Standard
44110 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
44113 \begin_layout Subsection
44114 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
44117 \begin_layout Standard
44118 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
44121 \begin_layout Standard
44122 Math macros are described in the
44129 \begin_layout Subsection
44133 \begin_layout Standard
44134 Shows the outline window as described in sections
44135 \begin_inset space ~
44139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44141 reference "sec:Navigating"
44147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44149 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
44157 \begin_layout Subsection
44161 \begin_layout Standard
44162 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
44163 as described in section
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44170 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44178 \begin_layout Subsection
44182 \begin_layout Standard
44183 Opens a window showing console messages.
44184 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
44186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44190 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
44191 is processing the document.
44194 \begin_layout Subsection
44196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44198 name "subsec:Toolbars"
44203 \begin_inset Index idx
44208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44217 \begin_layout Standard
44218 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
44219 All toolbars and the
44222 \begin_inset space ~
44240 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44266 \begin_inset space ~
44279 \begin_inset space ~
44284 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
44289 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
44306 \begin_layout Standard
44311 state the toolbar is permanently shown,
44316 state it is never shown;
44321 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
44322 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
44323 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively,
44324 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment.
44327 \begin_layout Standard
44329 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44336 reference "sec:Toolbars"
44344 \begin_layout Subsection
44348 \begin_layout Standard
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44356 \begin_inset space ~
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_inset space ~
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44377 will split \SpecialChar LyX
44378 's main window vertically while
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44406 will split it horizontally.
44407 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
44408 or to view the same document,
44409 but at different positions.
44410 You can even split the main window several times to view,
44412 three or more documents at the same time.
44413 To close a split view,
44417 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44429 \begin_layout Subsection
44433 \begin_layout Standard
44434 Closes a split view.
44437 \begin_layout Subsection
44441 \begin_layout Standard
44442 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
44443 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
44444 's main window fullscreen.
44445 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
44447 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
44450 \begin_layout Section
44452 \begin_inset Index idx
44457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44476 \begin_layout Subsection
44480 \begin_layout Standard
44481 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44488 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
44500 \begin_layout Subsection
44502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44504 name "subsec:Special-Character"
44511 \begin_layout Standard
44512 Here you can insert the following characters:
44515 \begin_layout Description
44520 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44522 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
44523 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44524 -packages you have installed.
44525 You can get a complete display by checking
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44534 \begin_inset Newline newline
44538 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44547 Not all characters will be visible in the
44551 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44558 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44563 ) can display every character.
44571 \begin_layout Description
44572 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
44577 \begin_layout Description
44579 \begin_inset space ~
44583 \begin_inset space ~
44586 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
44587 \begin_inset space ~
44591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44593 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
44601 \begin_layout Description
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44606 Quote Inserts this quote:
44608 no matter what quote style you selected in the
44610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44611 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44617 \begin_layout Description
44619 \begin_inset space ~
44622 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
44624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44625 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44631 \begin_layout Description
44633 \begin_inset space ~
44636 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that prevents automatic line breaks:
44637 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
44641 \begin_layout Description
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44646 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
44647 \SpecialChar breakableslash
44651 \begin_layout Description
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44656 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
44658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44662 \begin_inset space \space{}
44665 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
44666 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
44673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44676 To insert a fraction use the command
44681 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
44685 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
44691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44694 The visible space is hereby the character before the
44701 \begin_layout Description
44703 \begin_inset space ~
44706 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
44707 \SpecialChar menuseparator
44711 \begin_layout Description
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44717 \begin_inset Index idx
44722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44729 \begin_inset Index idx
44734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44736 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44750 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
44751 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44757 \begin_inset Index idx
44762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44780 \begin_inset Newline newline
44783 More information about this feature can be found in the
44789 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
44795 \begin_layout Description
44796 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
44801 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
44805 \begin_layout Subsection
44809 \begin_layout Standard
44810 Opens a submenu with the following options:
44813 \begin_layout Description
44814 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
44816 \begin_inset script superscript
44818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44828 \begin_layout Description
44829 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
44831 \begin_inset script subscript
44833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44842 \begin_layout Description
44844 \begin_inset space ~
44847 Space Inserts a non-breaking space as described in section
44848 \begin_inset space ~
44852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44854 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
44862 \begin_layout Description
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44867 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44874 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
44882 \begin_layout Description
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44887 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
44888 \begin_inset space ~
44892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44894 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
44902 \begin_layout Description
44904 \begin_inset space ~
44907 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
44908 \begin_inset space ~
44912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44914 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
44922 \begin_layout Description
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44927 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
44928 \begin_inset space ~
44932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44934 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
44942 \begin_layout Description
44944 \begin_inset space ~
44947 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
44948 \begin_inset space ~
44952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44954 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
44962 \begin_layout Description
44963 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44970 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
44978 \begin_layout Description
44980 \begin_inset space ~
44983 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
44984 \begin_inset space ~
44988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44990 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
44998 \begin_layout Description
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45003 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45010 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
45018 \begin_layout Description
45020 \begin_inset space ~
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45027 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
45029 \begin_inset space ~
45033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45035 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
45043 for a usage example.
45046 \begin_layout Description
45048 \begin_inset space ~
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45055 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45062 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45070 \begin_layout Description
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45075 Break Inserts a forced line break that justifies the remaining text as described in section
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45082 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45090 \begin_layout Description
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45095 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
45096 \begin_inset space ~
45100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45102 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45110 \begin_layout Description
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45115 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
45116 as described in section
45117 \begin_inset space ~
45121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45123 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45131 \begin_layout Description
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45140 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45141 to prevent a page break at the given position.
45143 \begin_inset space ~
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45153 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
45161 \begin_layout Description
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45166 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45173 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45181 \begin_layout Description
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_inset space ~
45190 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
45191 \begin_inset space ~
45195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45197 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45205 \begin_layout Subsection
45209 \begin_layout Standard
45210 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
45211 The submenu allows you to insert
45214 \begin_layout Description
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45219 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
45222 \begin_layout Description
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45231 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
45234 \begin_layout Description
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45239 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
45242 \begin_layout Description
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45247 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
45250 \begin_layout Description
45252 \begin_inset space ~
45256 \begin_inset space ~
45259 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
45262 \begin_layout Description
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45267 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
45270 \begin_layout Description
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45283 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
45286 \begin_layout Description
45288 \begin_inset space ~
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45295 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
45297 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
45300 \begin_layout Description
45302 \begin_inset space ~
45305 Name inserts the user name as specified in
45307 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45308 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45314 \begin_layout Description
45316 \begin_inset space ~
45319 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
45321 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45322 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45328 \begin_layout Description
45329 Other\SpecialChar ldots
45330 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
45333 \begin_layout Subsection
45336 List/Contents/References
45339 \begin_layout Standard
45340 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
45344 \begin_inset space ~
45368 are described in section
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45375 reference "sec:toc"
45385 is described in section
45386 \begin_inset space ~
45390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45392 reference "sec:Index"
45402 is described in section
45403 \begin_inset space ~
45407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45409 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45416 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45419 is described in section
45420 \begin_inset space ~
45424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45426 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45434 \begin_layout Subsection
45438 \begin_layout Standard
45440 as described in section
45441 \begin_inset space ~
45445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45447 reference "sec:Floats"
45452 and in detail the chapter
45459 \begin_inset space ~
45467 \begin_layout Subsection
45471 \begin_layout Standard
45473 described in section
45474 \begin_inset space ~
45478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45480 reference "sec:Notes"
45488 \begin_layout Subsection
45492 \begin_layout Standard
45493 Inserts a branch inset,
45495 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
45496 Branches are described in section
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45503 reference "sec:Branches"
45511 \begin_layout Subsection
45515 \begin_layout Standard
45516 Inserts document class-specific insets.
45517 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
45518 An example is the document class
45522 with three custom insets.
45525 Flex insets and InsetLayout
45529 Installing New Document Classes,
45530 The Layout file format
45536 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
45539 \begin_layout Subsection
45541 \begin_inset Index idx
45546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45555 \begin_layout Standard
45556 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
45557 For more information see chapter
45559 External Document Parts
45562 \begin_inset space ~
45568 \begin_layout Subsection
45570 \begin_inset Index idx
45575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45584 \begin_layout Standard
45585 Inserts a box in a certain style.
45586 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45601 \begin_layout Subsection
45605 \begin_layout Standard
45610 dialog as described in section
45611 \begin_inset space ~
45615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45617 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45625 \begin_layout Subsection
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45634 as described in section
45635 \begin_inset space ~
45639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45641 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45649 \begin_layout Subsection
45653 \begin_layout Standard
45658 as described in section
45659 \begin_inset space ~
45663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45665 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45673 \begin_layout Subsection
45675 \begin_inset Index idx
45680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 \begin_inset Index idx
45692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45694 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45704 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45721 \begin_layout Standard
45722 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
45723 Floats are described in section
45724 \begin_inset space ~
45728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45730 reference "sec:Floats"
45736 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
45738 Multi-page Table Captions
45743 \begin_inset space ~
45751 \begin_layout Subsection
45755 \begin_layout Standard
45756 Inserts an index entry as described in section
45757 \begin_inset space ~
45761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45763 reference "sec:Index"
45771 \begin_layout Subsection
45775 \begin_layout Standard
45776 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
45777 \begin_inset space ~
45781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45783 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45791 \begin_layout Subsection
45795 \begin_layout Standard
45796 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
45797 Tables are described in section
45798 \begin_inset space ~
45802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45804 reference "sec:Tables"
45809 and in detail in the chapter
45816 \begin_inset space ~
45824 \begin_layout Subsection
45828 \begin_layout Standard
45834 Graphics are described in section
45835 \begin_inset space ~
45839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45841 reference "sec:Graphics"
45849 \begin_layout Subsection
45853 \begin_layout Standard
45854 Inserts a URL as described in section
45855 \begin_inset space ~
45859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45861 reference "subsec:URLs"
45869 \begin_layout Subsection
45873 \begin_layout Standard
45874 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
45875 \begin_inset space ~
45879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45881 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
45889 \begin_layout Subsection
45893 \begin_layout Standard
45894 Inserts a footnote as described in section
45895 \begin_inset space ~
45899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45901 reference "sec:Footnotes"
45909 \begin_layout Subsection
45913 \begin_layout Standard
45914 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
45915 \begin_inset space ~
45919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45921 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
45929 \begin_layout Subsection
45932 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
45935 \begin_layout Standard
45936 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
45938 \begin_inset space ~
45942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45944 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
45949 for an explanation.
45952 \begin_layout Subsection
45956 \begin_layout Standard
45957 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
45958 in or behind a section heading,
45959 title or caption of a float.
45960 Inserts a short title as described in section
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45967 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
45975 \begin_layout Subsection
45980 \begin_layout Standard
45981 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
45982 Code box as described in section
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45989 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
45997 \begin_layout Subsection
45999 \begin_inset Index idx
46004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 \begin_layout Standard
46014 Inserts a program listings box.
46015 Program listings are explained in the chapter
46017 Program Code Listings
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46030 \begin_layout Subsection
46034 \begin_layout Standard
46035 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
46036 \begin_inset space ~
46040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46042 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46050 \begin_layout Section
46052 \begin_inset Index idx
46057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46076 \begin_layout Standard
46077 This menu lists the existing chapters,
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46085 of the current document.
46086 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
46089 \begin_layout Subsection
46093 \begin_layout Standard
46094 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
46095 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46102 To create bookmarks for this example,
46104 \begin_inset space ~
46107 2.5 and use the submenu
46110 \begin_inset space ~
46114 \begin_inset space ~
46121 \begin_inset space ~
46127 \begin_inset space ~
46131 \begin_inset space ~
46137 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
46140 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
46146 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
46149 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
46152 \begin_layout Standard
46156 \begin_inset space ~
46161 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
46164 \begin_inset space ~
46169 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
46172 \begin_layout Subsection
46178 \begin_layout Standard
46179 Jump to the next note,
46181 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
46184 \begin_layout Subsection
46188 \begin_layout Standard
46189 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
46190 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
46191 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
46194 \begin_inset space ~
46198 \begin_inset space ~
46206 \begin_layout Subsection
46210 \begin_layout Standard
46211 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
46214 The \SpecialChar LyX
46215 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46230 manual for a detailed description.
46233 \begin_layout Section
46235 \begin_inset Index idx
46240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46259 \begin_layout Subsection
46263 \begin_layout Standard
46264 Change Tracking is described in section
46265 \begin_inset space ~
46269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46271 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46279 \begin_layout Subsection
46287 \begin_layout Standard
46288 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
46289 by viewing or exporting a document,
46290 this menu will be enabled.
46291 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46293 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
46295 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
46296 \begin_inset Newline newline
46299 With the help of the logfile,
46300 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46304 \begin_layout Standard
46307 Open Containing Directory
46309 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
46310 's temporary folder for the document.
46311 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
46312 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
46313 For example some journals require to send the
46317 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46321 \begin_layout Subsection
46322 Start Appendix Here
46325 \begin_layout Standard
46326 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
46327 \begin_inset space ~
46331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46333 reference "sec:Appendices"
46341 \begin_layout Subsection
46343 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_layout Standard
46350 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
46352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46354 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46356 \begin_inset space ~
46360 \begin_inset space ~
46367 \begin_inset space ~
46371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46373 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46378 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
46381 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46382 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46384 \begin_inset space ~
46387 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46392 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46394 \begin_inset space ~
46398 \begin_inset space ~
46405 \begin_inset space ~
46409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46411 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46416 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
46417 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46419 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46420 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46422 \begin_inset space ~
46425 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46427 \begin_inset space ~
46430 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46435 \begin_inset space ~
46439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46441 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46447 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46448 when it is first configured.
46449 The default output format is
46452 \begin_inset space ~
46460 \begin_layout Subsection
46461 View (Other Formats)
46464 \begin_layout Standard
46465 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
46466 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
46467 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
46468 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46469 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
46471 All possible formats are listed in section
46472 \begin_inset space ~
46476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46478 reference "subsec:Export"
46484 You should at least see the menu entry
46490 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46492 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
46494 \begin_inset space ~
46498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46500 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
46506 \begin_inset Index idx
46511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46512 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
46521 \begin_layout Standard
46522 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
46523 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46525 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46526 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46528 \begin_inset space ~
46531 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46533 \begin_inset space ~
46536 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46541 \begin_inset space ~
46545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46547 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46553 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46554 when it is first configured.
46557 \begin_layout Subsection
46559 \begin_inset space ~
46565 \begin_layout Standard
46566 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
46569 \begin_layout Subsection
46570 Update (Other Formats)
46573 \begin_layout Standard
46574 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
46577 \begin_layout Subsection
46578 View Master Document
46581 \begin_layout Standard
46582 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46598 \begin_inset space ~
46603 manual for more information on this topic).
46604 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
46606 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
46610 \begin_inset space ~
46614 \begin_inset space ~
46619 generates the output of the whole book,
46624 will just output the chapter alone.
46627 \begin_layout Standard
46628 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46631 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46632 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46634 \begin_inset space ~
46638 \begin_inset space ~
46645 \begin_inset space ~
46649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46651 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46656 ) or in the preferences (menu
46658 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46659 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46661 \begin_inset space ~
46664 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46666 \begin_inset space ~
46669 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46671 \begin_inset space ~
46675 \begin_inset space ~
46682 \begin_inset space ~
46686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46688 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46696 \begin_layout Subsection
46697 Update Master Document
46700 \begin_layout Standard
46701 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46717 \begin_inset space ~
46722 manual for more information on this topic).
46723 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
46726 \begin_layout Standard
46727 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46731 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46733 \begin_inset space ~
46737 \begin_inset space ~
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46750 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46755 ) or in the preferences (menu
46757 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46758 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46760 \begin_inset space ~
46763 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46765 \begin_inset space ~
46768 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46770 \begin_inset space ~
46774 \begin_inset space ~
46781 \begin_inset space ~
46785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46787 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46795 \begin_layout Subsection
46797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46799 name "subsec:Compressed"
46806 \begin_layout Standard
46807 Un/compresses the current document.
46808 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
46810 Additional Features
46812 manual for details).
46815 \begin_layout Subsection
46819 \begin_layout Standard
46820 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
46823 \begin_layout Subsection
46827 \begin_layout Standard
46828 The document settings are described in appendix
46829 \begin_inset space ~
46833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46835 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46843 \begin_layout Section
46845 \begin_inset Index idx
46850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46852 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46869 \begin_layout Subsection
46873 \begin_layout Standard
46874 Spell checking is explained in section
46875 \begin_inset space ~
46879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46881 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
46889 \begin_layout Subsection
46893 \begin_layout Standard
46894 The thesaurus is described in section
46895 \begin_inset space ~
46899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46901 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
46909 \begin_layout Subsection
46911 \begin_inset Index idx
46916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46923 \begin_inset Index idx
46928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46937 \begin_layout Standard
46938 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
46941 \begin_layout Subsection
46947 \begin_inset Index idx
46952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46953 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
46962 \begin_layout Standard
46963 Generates with the help of the program
46965 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
46968 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
46969 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
46970 This feature is not available on Windows.
46973 \begin_layout Subsection
46979 \begin_inset Index idx
46984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46994 \begin_layout Standard
46995 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47000 \begin_inset space ~
47005 to see the full filename paths.
47008 \begin_layout Subsection
47010 \begin_inset Index idx
47015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47024 \begin_layout Standard
47025 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
47026 files as described in section
47027 \begin_inset space ~
47031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47033 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
47041 \begin_layout Subsection
47043 \begin_inset Index idx
47048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47051 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47061 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
47064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47065 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47077 \begin_inset Index idx
47082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47083 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47092 \begin_layout Standard
47093 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
47097 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47098 -packages and programs it needs;
47100 \begin_inset space ~
47104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47106 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47114 \begin_layout Subsection
47118 \begin_layout Standard
47123 dialog as described in detail in appendix
47124 \begin_inset space ~
47128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47130 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47138 \begin_layout Section
47140 \begin_inset Index idx
47145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47147 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47164 \begin_layout Standard
47165 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
47166 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
47168 If a file is not available in this language,
47169 the English version will be listed.
47172 \begin_layout Standard
47176 \begin_inset space ~
47181 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
47182 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47183 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
47185 \begin_inset space ~
47189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47191 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
47199 \begin_layout Standard
47203 \begin_inset space ~
47208 gives information about the copyright,
47209 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
47210 version you are using.
47213 \begin_layout Section
47215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47217 name "sec:Toolbars"
47224 \begin_layout Standard
47225 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
47226 \begin_inset space ~
47230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47232 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
47240 \begin_layout Standard
47241 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
47242 This is described in the
47244 Additional Features
47249 \begin_layout Subsection
47251 \begin_inset Index idx
47256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47258 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47275 \begin_layout Standard
47276 \begin_inset Graphics
47277 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
47285 \begin_layout Standard
47286 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47292 \begin_layout Standard
47293 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
47297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47309 \begin_inset Note Note
47312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47313 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
47318 manual for more information.
47326 \begin_layout Standard
47327 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47333 \begin_layout Standard
47334 \begin_inset Tabular
47335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
47336 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47344 \begin_inset Graphics
47345 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
47355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47359 pull-down box for the environments
47372 \begin_layout Standard
47373 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
47379 \begin_layout Standard
47381 \begin_inset Tabular
47382 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
47383 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47384 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47385 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47409 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47439 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47469 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47485 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
47493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47499 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47515 arg "spelling-continuously"
47523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47527 Spellcheck continuously
47533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47616 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47646 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47681 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47697 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
47705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47711 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47737 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
47745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47751 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47779 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
47787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47793 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47794 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
47801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47826 arg "dialog-show character"
47835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47856 Set text to noun style,
47860 arg "dialog-show character"
47869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47876 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
47884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47890 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47941 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
47943 \begin_inset space ~
47952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47961 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
47969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
47982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47989 arg "tabular-insert"
47997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48010 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48017 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
48025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48047 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
48055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48059 Toggle outline window on/off,
48062 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48078 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
48086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48090 Toggle math toolbar on/off
48096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48105 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
48113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48117 Toggle table toolbar on/off
48130 \begin_layout Subsection
48132 \begin_inset Index idx
48137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48156 \begin_layout Standard
48157 \begin_inset Graphics
48158 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
48166 \begin_layout Standard
48167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48173 \begin_layout Standard
48174 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
48177 \begin_layout Standard
48178 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48184 \begin_layout Standard
48185 \begin_inset Tabular
48186 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
48187 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
48188 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48189 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48226 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
48234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48253 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
48261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48280 arg "layout-toggle List"
48288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48307 arg "layout-toggle Description"
48315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48334 arg "depth-increment"
48342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48348 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48354 \begin_inset space ~
48363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48372 arg "depth-decrement"
48380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48386 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48388 \begin_inset space ~
48392 \begin_inset space ~
48401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48410 arg "float-insert figure"
48418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48425 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 arg "float-insert table"
48449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48456 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48502 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
48510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48532 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
48540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48578 \begin_inset space ~
48587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48596 arg "nomencl-insert"
48604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48610 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48612 \begin_inset space ~
48621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48630 arg "footnote-insert"
48638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48660 arg "marginalnote-insert"
48668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48676 \begin_inset space ~
48685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48709 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
48711 \begin_inset space ~
48720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48729 arg "box-insert Frameless"
48737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48780 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48805 \begin_inset space ~
48814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48823 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
48831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48838 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
48845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48854 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
48862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48869 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48871 \begin_inset space ~
48880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48889 arg "dialog-show character"
48897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48905 \begin_inset space ~
48908 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
48915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 arg "textstyle-apply"
48932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48936 Format text using the recent settings in the
48939 arg "dialog-show character"
48948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48957 arg "layout-paragraph"
48965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48971 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48973 \begin_inset space ~
48982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 arg "thesaurus-entry"
48999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49005 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49019 \begin_layout Subsection
49020 View/Update Toolbar
49021 \begin_inset Index idx
49026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49028 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49045 \begin_layout Standard
49046 \begin_inset Graphics
49047 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
49054 \begin_layout Standard
49055 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49061 \begin_layout Standard
49062 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
49065 \begin_layout Standard
49066 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49072 \begin_layout Standard
49073 \begin_inset Tabular
49074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
49075 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49076 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49077 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49117 arg "buffer-update"
49125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49131 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49147 arg "master-buffer-view"
49155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49163 \begin_inset space ~
49167 \begin_inset space ~
49176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49185 arg "master-buffer-update"
49193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49201 \begin_inset space ~
49205 \begin_inset space ~
49214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49223 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
49231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49238 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49239 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
49240 Synchronize with Output
49246 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49268 View (Other Formats)
49274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49281 arg "update-others"
49289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49296 Update (Other Formats)
49309 \begin_layout Subsection
49313 \begin_layout Standard
49314 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
49315 \begin_inset space ~
49319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49321 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49328 \begin_inset Index idx
49333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49335 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49352 \begin_inset space ~
49357 manual and the math macro toolbar
49358 \begin_inset Index idx
49363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49386 \begin_layout Chapter
49387 The Document Settings
49388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49390 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
49395 \begin_inset Index idx
49400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49419 \begin_layout Standard
49423 \begin_inset space ~
49428 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
49430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49434 You can save your document settings as default with the
49436 Save as Document Defaults
49438 button in any dialog.
49439 This will create a template named
49443 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
49444 when you create a new document without using a template.
49447 \begin_layout Standard
49452 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
49453 This affects mostly class options,
49454 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
49457 \begin_layout Standard
49458 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
49459 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
49460 To find a setting quicker,
49461 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
49463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49467 \begin_inset space \space{}
49471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49479 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
49480 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
49481 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
49484 \begin_layout Section
49488 \begin_layout Standard
49489 Here you set the document class,
49492 and a master document.
49493 Document classes are described in section
49494 \begin_inset space ~
49498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49500 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
49508 \begin_layout Standard
49512 \begin_inset space ~
49517 you can load you own layout-file,
49518 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
49523 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
49524 as a layout for a document class.
49525 For more about layout-files,
49528 Installing New Document Classes,
49529 Types of Layout Files
49538 \begin_layout Standard
49539 Some classes use special class options by default.
49540 If this is the case,
49541 they are listed in the field
49545 and you can decide to use them or not.
49546 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
49547 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
49552 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49554 color and page layout packages.
49560 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49562 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
49566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49567 When you want to use one of the following drivers
49568 \begin_inset Newline newline
49582 \begin_inset Newline newline
49585 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49594 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
49607 \begin_layout Standard
49612 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
49613 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
49614 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
49615 This way child documents are always compilable.
49616 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
49623 \begin_inset space ~
49631 \begin_layout Standard
49632 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49642 \begin_inset Index idx
49647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49650 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49665 \begin_inset Index idx
49670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49673 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49687 for cross-references,
49689 \begin_inset space ~
49693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49695 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49703 \begin_layout Section
49707 \begin_layout Standard
49708 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
49709 Please refer to the section
49712 \begin_inset space ~
49720 \begin_inset space ~
49725 manual for details.
49728 \begin_layout Section
49732 \begin_layout Standard
49733 Modules are explained in section
49734 \begin_inset space ~
49738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49740 reference "subsec:Modules"
49748 \begin_layout Section
49752 \begin_layout Standard
49754 \begin_inset space ~
49758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49760 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
49768 \begin_layout Section
49772 \begin_layout Standard
49773 The document font settings are described in section
49774 \begin_inset space ~
49778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49780 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
49788 \begin_layout Section
49792 \begin_layout Standard
49793 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
49805 \begin_inset space ~
49810 and whether it should be a
49813 \begin_inset space ~
49818 can also be specified here.
49821 \begin_layout Standard
49822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
49823 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
49824 That would be impractical,
49826 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
49828 it will be as you specified in the output.
49831 \begin_layout Standard
49834 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
49837 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
49838 justifies the text on screen.
49839 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
49843 \begin_layout Standard
49852 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
49855 \begin_layout Section
49859 \begin_layout Standard
49860 This dialog is described in sections
49861 \begin_inset space ~
49865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49867 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
49873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49875 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
49883 \begin_layout Section
49887 \begin_layout Standard
49888 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
49889 \begin_inset space ~
49893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49895 reference "subsec:Margins"
49903 \begin_layout Section
49905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49907 name "sec:Language-encodings"
49912 \begin_inset Index idx
49917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49919 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49936 \begin_layout Standard
49937 The document language and quote styles are set here.
49938 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49939 (the \SpecialChar LyX
49940 file is always encoded in utf8).
49941 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
49942 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
49943 -command is not known for a particular character).
49946 \begin_layout Standard
49949 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
49950 files in Unicode – or utf8,
49951 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
49952 's default encoding).
49953 This should normally fit your needs,
49954 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
49955 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
49956 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
49957 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
49959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49967 encodings is necessary.
49970 \begin_layout Standard
49972 provides support for these traditional encodings.
49975 Traditional (auto-selected)
49983 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).If the document contains text in more than one language you thus may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49988 \begin_layout Standard
49990 you can also select
49995 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
49996 Note that this encoding is then used for
50001 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
50004 \begin_layout Standard
50009 selection in the next dropdown menu does what it states:
50010 it prevents \SpecialChar LyX
50011 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50017 \begin_inset Index idx
50022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50025 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50040 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
50042 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
50044 Note that this option is only available for the standard
50050 Traditional (auto-selected)
50055 \begin_layout Standard
50059 \begin_inset space ~
50064 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50065 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
50066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50074 The possible settings are:
50077 \begin_layout Description
50078 Default uses the language package that is selected in
50080 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50081 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50085 \begin_inset space ~
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50091 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50099 \begin_layout Description
50100 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
50101 In many cases this will be
50106 \begin_inset Index idx
50111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50114 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50129 If the newer package
50134 \begin_inset Index idx
50139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50142 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50156 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50157 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50158 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
50160 this package will be used instead of
50167 \begin_layout Description
50169 \begin_inset space ~
50180 would be more appropriate.
50183 \begin_layout Description
50184 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
50185 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
50189 (for German texts),
50193 \begin_inset Newline newline
50198 usepackage{ngerman}
50201 \begin_layout Description
50202 None will not use a language package.
50203 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
50206 \begin_layout Standard
50207 Here is a list with the important encodings:
50210 \begin_layout Description
50211 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
50212 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
50214 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
50216 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
50217 -commands are needed.
50220 \begin_layout Description
50222 \begin_inset space ~
50226 \begin_inset space ~
50229 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
50232 \begin_layout Description
50234 \begin_inset space ~
50238 \begin_inset space ~
50241 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
50244 \begin_layout Description
50246 \begin_inset space ~
50249 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
50252 \begin_layout Description
50254 \begin_inset space ~
50258 \begin_inset space ~
50261 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
50262 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50263 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50266 \begin_layout Description
50268 \begin_inset space ~
50272 \begin_inset space ~
50275 8859-13) for Estonian,
50276 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50277 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
50280 \begin_layout Description
50282 \begin_inset space ~
50286 \begin_inset space ~
50289 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
50290 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50291 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50294 \begin_layout Description
50296 \begin_inset space ~
50300 \begin_inset space ~
50304 \begin_inset space ~
50307 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
50308 \begin_inset space ~
50314 \begin_layout Description
50316 \begin_inset space ~
50320 \begin_inset space ~
50324 \begin_inset space ~
50327 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
50334 Slovak and Slovenian
50337 \begin_layout Description
50339 \begin_inset space ~
50343 \begin_inset space ~
50346 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
50347 used especially on UNIX OSes,
50348 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50349 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50350 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50351 \begin_inset space ~
50355 \begin_inset space ~
50361 \begin_layout Description
50363 \begin_inset space ~
50367 \begin_inset space ~
50370 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
50371 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
50372 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50373 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50374 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50375 \begin_inset space ~
50379 \begin_inset space ~
50385 \begin_layout Description
50387 \begin_inset space ~
50391 \begin_inset space ~
50394 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
50397 \begin_layout Description
50399 \begin_inset space ~
50403 \begin_inset space ~
50406 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
50409 \begin_layout Description
50411 \begin_inset space ~
50415 \begin_inset space ~
50418 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
50421 Serbian and Ukrainian
50424 \begin_layout Description
50426 \begin_inset space ~
50429 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
50432 \begin_layout Description
50434 \begin_inset space ~
50437 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
50440 \begin_layout Description
50442 \begin_inset space ~
50446 \begin_inset space ~
50449 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
50452 \begin_layout Description
50454 \begin_inset space ~
50458 \begin_inset space ~
50464 \begin_layout Description
50466 \begin_inset space ~
50470 \begin_inset space ~
50473 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
50474 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
50477 \begin_layout Description
50479 \begin_inset space ~
50483 \begin_inset space ~
50489 \begin_layout Description
50491 \begin_inset space ~
50495 \begin_inset space ~
50498 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50499 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50505 \begin_inset Index idx
50510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50513 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50529 set the document language to
50534 \begin_layout Description
50536 \begin_inset space ~
50540 \begin_inset space ~
50543 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50544 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50551 set the document language to
50554 \begin_inset space ~
50560 \begin_layout Description
50562 \begin_inset space ~
50566 \begin_inset space ~
50569 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50570 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50576 \begin_inset Index idx
50581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50584 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50600 set the document language to
50605 \begin_layout Description
50607 \begin_inset space ~
50611 \begin_inset space ~
50614 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50615 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50622 set the document language to
50627 \begin_layout Description
50629 \begin_inset space ~
50633 \begin_inset space ~
50636 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
50637 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50644 set the document language to
50649 \begin_layout Description
50651 \begin_inset space ~
50654 (EUC-KR) for Korean
50657 \begin_layout Description
50659 \begin_inset space ~
50663 \begin_inset space ~
50667 \begin_inset space ~
50670 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
50672 Maltese and Turkish
50675 \begin_layout Description
50677 \begin_inset space ~
50681 \begin_inset space ~
50685 \begin_inset space ~
50688 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
50697 Romanian and Slovenian,
50698 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
50701 \begin_layout Description
50703 \begin_inset space ~
50707 \begin_inset space ~
50713 \begin_layout Description
50715 \begin_inset space ~
50719 \begin_inset space ~
50722 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
50723 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
50726 \begin_layout Description
50728 \begin_inset space ~
50732 \begin_inset space ~
50735 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50741 \begin_inset Index idx
50746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50749 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50763 (for the languages Chinese,
50764 Japanese and Korean).
50765 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
50766 with the default encoding (
50768 Unicode (utf8) [default]
50774 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
50775 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50778 \begin_layout Description
50780 \begin_inset space ~
50788 \begin_inset space ~
50791 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
50798 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50802 which use Unicode directly,
50803 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50810 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50811 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50813 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50816 \begin_layout Description
50818 \begin_inset space ~
50822 \begin_inset space ~
50825 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50831 \begin_inset Index idx
50836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50839 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50855 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
50856 This used to be more comprehensive than
50859 \begin_inset space ~
50865 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
50868 \begin_layout Description
50870 \begin_inset space ~
50873 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50879 \begin_inset Index idx
50884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50887 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50902 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
50903 with the default encoding (
50905 Unicode (utf8) [default]
50911 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
50912 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50915 \begin_layout Description
50917 \begin_inset space ~
50921 \begin_inset space ~
50925 \begin_inset space ~
50928 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
50929 \begin_inset space ~
50935 \begin_layout Description
50937 \begin_inset space ~
50941 \begin_inset space ~
50945 \begin_inset space ~
50948 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
50963 Spanish and Swedish;
50964 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
50967 \begin_layout Description
50969 \begin_inset space ~
50973 \begin_inset space ~
50977 \begin_inset space ~
50980 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
50981 but with the Euro currency sign,
50982 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
50985 \begin_layout Section
50987 \begin_inset Index idx
50992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50994 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51009 \begin_inset Index idx
51014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51016 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51031 \begin_inset Index idx
51036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51038 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51053 \begin_inset Index idx
51058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51060 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51077 \begin_layout Standard
51078 Here you can alter the font color for the
51087 \begin_inset space ~
51093 light grey)for the background color for the
51101 \begin_inset space ~
51112 sets the color back to the default.
51115 \begin_layout Standard
51116 Clicking any button showing
51124 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
51125 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
51128 \begin_layout Standard
51133 \begin_inset space ~
51138 font color and use the option
51141 \begin_inset space ~
51146 in the document settings under
51149 \begin_inset space ~
51155 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
51156 \begin_inset space ~
51160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51162 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51170 \begin_layout Standard
51171 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
51177 \begin_layout Standard
51181 \begin_inset space ~
51190 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
51192 \begin_inset space ~
51195 Code after a forced page break:
51198 \begin_layout Itemize
51199 For the page color:
51200 \begin_inset Newline newline
51207 pagecolor{color name}
51210 \begin_layout Itemize
51211 For the text color:
51212 \begin_inset Newline newline
51222 \begin_layout Standard
51223 You are restricted to one of
51265 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
51272 \begin_inset space ~
51278 \begin_inset Newline newline
51281 If you have changed a text or background color,
51282 you can use the following names to refer to them:
51285 \begin_layout Itemize
51291 \begin_inset Newline newline
51296 page_backgroundcolor
51299 \begin_layout Itemize
51303 \begin_inset space ~
51309 \begin_inset Newline newline
51317 \begin_layout Itemize
51321 \begin_inset space ~
51327 \begin_inset Newline newline
51335 \begin_layout Itemize
51339 \begin_inset space ~
51345 \begin_inset Newline newline
51353 \begin_layout Standard
51354 To see how to define and use custom colors,
51358 \begin_inset space ~
51366 \begin_inset space ~
51374 \begin_layout Section
51378 \begin_layout Standard
51379 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
51380 \begin_inset space ~
51384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51386 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51395 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
51396 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
51399 \begin_layout Standard
51401 you can advise \SpecialChar LyX
51402 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
51403 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
51406 \begin_layout Section
51410 \begin_layout Standard
51411 Here you can adjust the
51415 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
51419 as described in section
51420 \begin_inset space ~
51424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51426 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
51434 \begin_layout Standard
51435 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
51436 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
51437 The most common one are:
51440 \begin_layout Description
51441 right Line numbers to the right margin
51444 \begin_layout Description
51445 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
51449 \begin_layout Description
51450 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
51453 \begin_layout Description
51454 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
51457 \begin_layout Description
51458 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
51461 \begin_layout Description
51463 \begin_inset space ~
51466 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
51469 \begin_layout Section
51473 \begin_layout Standard
51474 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51480 \begin_inset Index idx
51485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51488 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51508 \begin_inset Index idx
51513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51516 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51535 \begin_inset Index idx
51540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51543 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51558 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51562 Sectioned bibliography
51564 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51570 \begin_inset Index idx
51575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51578 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51598 you can select the style files and specify further options.
51600 you can select a document-specific
51604 for the generation of the bibliography.
51605 For a further description of these possibilities see section
51606 \begin_inset space ~
51610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51612 reference "sec:Bibliography"
51620 \begin_layout Section
51624 \begin_layout Standard
51625 Here you can define the
51629 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
51630 \begin_inset space ~
51634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51636 reference "sec:Index"
51644 \begin_layout Section
51648 \begin_layout Standard
51649 The PDF properties are explained in section
51650 \begin_inset space ~
51654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51656 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51664 \begin_layout Section
51668 \begin_layout Standard
51669 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
51670 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51676 \begin_inset Index idx
51681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51684 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51704 \begin_inset Index idx
51709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51712 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51732 \begin_inset Index idx
51737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51740 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51760 \begin_inset Index idx
51765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51768 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51788 \begin_inset Index idx
51793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51796 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51816 \begin_inset Index idx
51821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51844 \begin_inset Index idx
51849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51852 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51872 \begin_inset Index idx
51877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51880 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51900 \begin_inset Index idx
51905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51908 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51927 \begin_inset Index idx
51932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51935 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51950 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
51953 \begin_layout Description
51954 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
51955 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
51956 -errors in formulas,
51957 ensure that you have this enabled.
51960 \begin_layout Description
51961 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
51962 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
51963 -errors in formulas,
51964 ensure that you have this enabled.
51967 \begin_layout Description
51968 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
51972 \begin_inset space ~
51984 \begin_layout Description
51985 esint is used for special integral characters,
51989 \begin_inset space ~
52001 \begin_layout Description
52002 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
52014 \begin_layout Description
52015 mathtools is used for the math commands
52056 and labeled arrows,
52057 see the corresponding sections in the
52064 \begin_layout Description
52065 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
52068 Chemical Symbols and Equations
52077 \begin_layout Description
52078 stackrel is used for the math command
52096 \begin_layout Description
52097 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
52100 \begin_layout Description
52101 undertilde is used for the math command
52110 Accents for one Character
52119 \begin_layout Section
52123 \begin_layout Standard
52124 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
52127 \begin_layout Standard
52128 Details are described in the section
52131 \begin_inset space ~
52139 \begin_inset space ~
52147 \begin_layout Section
52151 \begin_layout Standard
52152 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
52154 Program Code Listings
52159 \begin_inset space ~
52167 \begin_layout Section
52171 \begin_layout Standard
52172 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
52181 set to be used and set the
52186 The itemize environment is described in section
52187 \begin_inset space ~
52191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52193 reference "sec:Itemize"
52201 \begin_layout Standard
52202 You can furthermore specify a
52205 \begin_inset space ~
52210 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52211 command of the desired character.
52212 For example to use the € sign,
52213 you have to insert the command
52220 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
52222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52226 \begin_inset space \space{}
52230 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
52240 To find the command for a math symbol,
52241 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
52244 \begin_layout Standard
52245 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52254 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52255 -packages in the preamble (menu
52257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52258 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52261 \begin_inset space ~
52267 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
52271 usepackage{textcomp}
52274 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
52278 usepackage{amssymb}
52288 \begin_layout Section
52292 \begin_layout Standard
52293 Branches are described in section
52294 \begin_inset space ~
52298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52300 reference "sec:Branches"
52308 \begin_layout Section
52310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52312 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
52319 \begin_layout Standard
52320 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
52323 \begin_layout Description
52325 \begin_inset space ~
52330 Save transient properties
52332 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
52333 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
52337 \begin_layout Itemize
52338 the activation of change tracking
52341 \begin_layout Itemize
52342 the output of tracked changes
52345 \begin_layout Itemize
52346 the recording of the document directory path.
52349 \begin_layout Standard
52350 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
52354 \begin_layout Description
52356 \begin_inset space ~
52360 \begin_inset space ~
52364 The format that is used when you enter
52365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52386 View Master Document
52387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52394 Update Master Document
52395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52402 menu or the toolbar.
52403 The default is set in
52405 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52406 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
52408 \begin_inset space ~
52411 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
52416 \begin_inset space ~
52420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52422 reference "sec:File-Formats"
52430 \begin_layout Description
52432 \begin_inset space ~
52436 \begin_inset space ~
52439 Options offers settings for the
52447 \begin_layout Itemize
52450 Synchronize with Output
52455 \begin_inset space ~
52460 and allows to customize the macro used in this process (for a detailed description see section
52462 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52467 \begin_inset space ~
52475 \begin_layout Itemize
52478 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
52480 determines whether so-called
52481 \begin_inset Quotes els
52485 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52489 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
52490 \begin_inset Quotes els
52494 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52497 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
52498 (such as sections or captions),
52499 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
52501 This setting is on by default,
52502 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
52504 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
52505 you can uncheck this.
52506 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
52508 just leave it checked.
52512 \begin_layout Description
52514 \begin_inset space ~
52518 \begin_inset space ~
52521 Options offers settings for the export format
52529 \begin_inset space ~
52534 will assure that the output follows exactly version
52535 \begin_inset space ~
52538 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
52542 \begin_inset space ~
52547 settings are described in detail in section
52549 Math Output in XHTML
52554 \begin_inset space ~
52563 \begin_inset space ~
52567 \begin_inset space ~
52572 is used for the size of equations in the output.
52575 \begin_layout Description
52577 \begin_inset space ~
52581 \begin_inset space ~
52584 Options offers settings for the export format
52587 The details for the options are described in the chapter
52593 Additional Features
52598 \begin_layout Description
52602 \begin_layout Description
52604 \begin_inset space ~
52608 \begin_inset space ~
52612 \begin_inset space ~
52615 programs If this is switched on,
52621 option which is needed with some packages.
52622 Note that this comes with security risks,
52623 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
52626 \begin_layout Section
52634 \begin_layout Standard
52635 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52636 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
52638 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52640 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
52643 \begin_layout Standard
52644 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52645 -syntax is given in section
52646 \begin_inset space ~
52650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52652 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
52660 \begin_layout Chapter
52666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52668 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
52673 \begin_inset Index idx
52678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52687 \begin_layout Standard
52688 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
52690 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52694 It has the following submenus.
52697 \begin_layout Section
52701 \begin_layout Subsection
52705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52706 User Interface File
52707 \begin_inset Index idx
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52714 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52729 \begin_inset Index idx
52734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52736 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52753 \begin_layout Standard
52754 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
52755 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
52763 \begin_layout Description
52768 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
52771 \begin_layout Description
52778 the menu entries in popup context menus
52781 \begin_layout Description
52786 specifies the toolbar buttons
52789 \begin_layout Standard
52790 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
52791 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
52794 \begin_layout Standard
52795 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
52809 entries must be finished with an explicit
52839 and in the case of the
52840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52852 The syntax for the entries is:
52855 \begin_layout Standard
52856 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52885 \begin_layout Standard
52887 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52890 All the \SpecialChar LyX
52891 -functions are listed in the menu
52893 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
52895 \begin_inset space ~
52903 \begin_layout Standard
52904 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52910 \begin_layout Standard
52912 assuming you use the menu
52914 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52917 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
52918 you can add the line
52921 \begin_layout Standard
52922 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52946 \begin_layout Standard
52948 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52963 to have the sixth bookmark.
52966 \begin_layout Standard
52970 \begin_inset space ~
52975 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
52976 's toolbar buttons.
52977 The currently available icon sets are compared in
52978 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52981 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
52989 \begin_layout Standard
52993 \begin_inset space ~
52997 \begin_inset space ~
53002 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
53003 's user interface control elements.
53004 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
53005 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
53006 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
53007 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
53010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53014 \begin_layout Standard
53017 Enable tool tips in main work area
53019 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
53022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53026 \begin_layout Standard
53031 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
53032 should display in the menu
53034 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53036 \begin_inset space ~
53044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53048 \begin_layout Standard
53049 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
53054 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
53055 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
53056 the text then appears centered.
53059 \begin_layout Subsection
53063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53067 \begin_layout Standard
53070 Restore window layouts and geometries
53073 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53077 \begin_layout Standard
53080 Restore cursor positions
53082 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
53085 \begin_layout Standard
53088 Load opened files from last session
53090 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53094 \begin_layout Standard
53097 Clear all session information
53099 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
53100 sessions (cursor positions,
53101 names of last opened documents,
53105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53109 name "subsec:Backup documents"
53114 \begin_inset Index idx
53119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53121 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53138 \begin_layout Standard
53141 Backup original documents when saving
53143 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was saved the last time.
53144 It is stored in the
53147 \begin_inset space ~
53153 \begin_inset space ~
53157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53159 reference "sec:Paths"
53164 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
53167 \begin_inset space ~
53173 The backup file has the file extension
53177 and the same name than the original file.
53181 \begin_inset space ~
53187 the file has the full path in its file name,
53189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53204 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
53209 \begin_layout Standard
53212 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
53215 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
53216 These files which are stored as
53220 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
53221 Should \SpecialChar LyX
53222 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
53223 this file can be used as a resort.
53226 \begin_layout Standard
53227 Please read section
53228 \begin_inset space ~
53232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53234 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
53238 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
53239 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
53242 \begin_layout Standard
53245 Save documents compressed by default
53247 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
53248 \begin_inset space ~
53252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53254 reference "subsec:Compressed"
53260 This applies to newly created documents only.
53261 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
53264 \begin_layout Standard
53267 Save the document directory path
53269 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
53271 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
53272 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
53275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53276 Windows & work area
53279 \begin_layout Standard
53282 Open documents in tabs
53285 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53289 \begin_layout Standard
53294 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
53299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53301 \begin_inset space ~
53305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53307 reference "sec:Paths"
53312 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
53321 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53323 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
53324 instance is created for each file.
53327 \begin_layout Standard
53330 Single close-tab button
53333 there will only be one close button (
53343 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
53344 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
53345 Regardless of this option,
53346 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
53349 \begin_layout Standard
53350 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53359 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
53360 before the change takes effect.
53368 \begin_layout Standard
53373 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
53374 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
53376 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
53380 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
53381 and only want to close the view in once instance.
53384 \begin_layout Subsection
53386 \begin_inset Index idx
53391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53393 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53410 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
53417 \begin_layout Standard
53418 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
53422 \begin_layout Standard
53423 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53432 This section only deals with the fonts
53436 the \SpecialChar LyX
53438 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
53439 and set in the menu
53441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53442 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53453 \begin_layout Standard
53473 (depends on the system) as its
53476 \begin_inset space ~
53492 \begin_layout Standard
53493 You can change the font size with the
53500 \begin_layout Standard
53505 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
53507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53510 points have the size of 1
53511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53516 \begin_inset space ~
53520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53522 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
53528 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
53529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53533 The sizes are explained in detail in section
53534 \begin_inset space ~
53538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53540 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
53548 \begin_layout Subsection
53550 \begin_inset Index idx
53555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53557 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53573 \begin_inset Index idx
53578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53580 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53597 \begin_layout Standard
53598 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
53599 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
53606 \begin_layout Standard
53607 By checking the option
53611 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
53619 \begin_inset space ~
53623 \begin_inset space ~
53628 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
53631 \begin_layout Subsection
53633 \begin_inset Index idx
53638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53640 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53657 \begin_layout Standard
53658 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
53662 \begin_layout Standard
53667 enables previewing snippets of your document.
53668 This feature is described in section
53669 \begin_inset space ~
53673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53675 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
53683 \begin_layout Standard
53684 Checking the option
53687 \begin_inset space ~
53691 \begin_inset space ~
53695 \begin_inset space ~
53700 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
53703 \begin_layout Section
53705 \begin_inset Index idx
53710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53712 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53729 \begin_layout Subsection
53733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53737 \begin_layout Standard
53740 Cursor follows scrollbar
53742 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
53745 \begin_layout Standard
53746 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
53747 If you set the value to zero,
53748 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
53751 \begin_layout Standard
53754 Scroll below end of document
53756 is self-explanatory.
53759 \begin_layout Standard
53760 In \SpecialChar LyX
53761 one can jump from word to word by pressing
53768 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
53770 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
53771 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
53774 \begin_layout Standard
53777 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
53779 is only relevant in documents that
53785 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
53793 markup) with this option selected.
53794 It the option is not selected,
53795 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
53796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53801 \begin_inset Quotes els
53805 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53809 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
53810 dissolving from insets.
53821 \begin_inset Quotes els
53825 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53828 notwithstanding the state of this option.
53831 \begin_layout Standard
53834 Sort environments alphabetically
53836 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53839 \begin_layout Standard
53842 Group environments by their category
53844 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53847 \begin_layout Standard
53852 options determine the editing style for math macros,
53864 \begin_layout Standard
53867 Search drive for cited files
53869 allows \SpecialChar LyX
53870 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
53873 \begin_inset space ~
53877 \begin_inset space ~
53881 \begin_inset space ~
53885 \begin_inset space ~
53888 Content\SpecialChar ldots
53891 context menu on a citation.
53896 field determines the search pattern.
53898 \begin_inset space ~
53902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53904 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
53912 \begin_layout Subsection
53914 \begin_inset Index idx
53919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53926 \begin_inset Index idx
53931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53933 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53950 \begin_layout Standard
53955 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
53957 Several binding files are available,
53961 \begin_layout Description
53962 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
53965 \begin_layout Description
53966 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
53977 \begin_layout Description
53978 mac.bind a set of bindings for
53981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53989 \begin_layout Standard
53990 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
53996 and binding files for special languages.
53997 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
53999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54003 \begin_inset space \space{}
54007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54015 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
54016 in a certain language,
54018 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
54021 \begin_layout Standard
54022 Some binding files,
54028 only have a limited scope.
54029 When looking at the end of the file
54034 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
54037 \begin_layout Standard
54041 \begin_inset space ~
54045 \begin_inset space ~
54050 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
54053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54057 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
54062 \begin_inset Index idx
54067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54069 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54086 \begin_layout Standard
54087 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
54088 functions and the bound shortcuts.
54089 To find functions easily,
54090 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
54092 Show key-bindings containing
54095 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
54096 Insert there for example as keyword
54097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54104 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
54105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54114 one function can have more than one shortcut.
54115 All \SpecialChar LyX
54116 functions are also listed in the file
54121 that you will find in the
54128 \begin_layout Standard
54130 to add the shortcut
54139 select the function and press the
54144 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
54145 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
54148 \begin_layout Standard
54149 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
54150 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
54151 Function definition with “
54153 command-alternatives
54155 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
54157 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
54160 \begin_layout Standard
54161 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
54165 \begin_layout Standard
54166 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
54167 The syntax of the entries is:
54170 \begin_layout Standard
54176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54195 \begin_layout Standard
54198 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
54199 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
54200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54233 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
54234 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
54235 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
54236 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
54241 you needed to specify it as
54246 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
54247 you don't have to care for these specifics.
54249 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
54252 \begin_layout Subsection
54254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54256 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
54261 \begin_inset Index idx
54266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54273 \begin_inset Index idx
54278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54280 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54297 \begin_layout Standard
54298 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
54299 For the case where this is not possible,
54301 provides keyboard maps.
54304 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
54308 \begin_inset space ~
54312 \begin_inset space ~
54317 and select the keyboard map file named
54324 \begin_layout Standard
54339 you can select the first and second with
54342 arg "keymap-primary"
54348 arg "keymap-secondary"
54351 respectively or toggle between them with
54354 arg "keymap-toggle"
54360 \begin_layout Standard
54361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54370 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
54378 \begin_layout Standard
54379 You can also specify the mouse
54381 Wheel scrolling speed
54384 The standard value is 1.0;
54385 higher values speed up the scrolling,
54386 lower ones slow it down.
54389 Middle mouse button pasting
54391 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
54394 \begin_layout Standard
54402 \begin_inset space ~
54406 \begin_inset space ~
54412 you can select a key for zooming.
54413 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
54414 the text is zoomed.
54417 \begin_layout Subsection
54421 \begin_layout Standard
54422 Input completion is described in section
54423 \begin_inset space ~
54427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54429 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
54437 \begin_layout Section
54439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54446 \begin_inset Index idx
54451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54458 \begin_inset Index idx
54463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54465 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54482 \begin_layout Standard
54483 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
54484 are normally determined during the installation.
54485 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
54488 \begin_layout Description
54490 \begin_inset space ~
54493 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
54494 's working directory.
54495 It is the default when you
54507 \begin_inset space ~
54515 \begin_layout Description
54517 \begin_inset space ~
54520 templates This directory contains the templates that are shown in
54522 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54524 \begin_inset space ~
54528 \begin_inset space ~
54536 \begin_layout Description
54538 \begin_inset space ~
54541 files This directory contains the example files that are listed in
54543 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54549 \begin_layout Description
54551 \begin_inset space ~
54555 \begin_inset Index idx
54560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54576 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
54577 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
54578 \begin_inset space ~
54582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54584 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54594 will be used to save the backups.
54595 \begin_inset Newline newline
54598 Backup files have the ending
54599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54609 \begin_layout Description
54611 \begin_inset space ~
54614 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
54615 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
54617 \begin_inset Newline newline
54625 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54631 You can edit this file with the program
54640 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
54641 in its preferences under
54644 \begin_inset space ~
54650 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
54655 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
54657 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
54664 and \SpecialChar LyX
54665 need to be running the same time.
54666 \begin_inset Newline newline
54669 The pipe is also used for the
54675 \begin_inset space ~
54679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54681 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54687 \begin_inset Newline newline
54690 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
54691 Server-Pipe on Windows,
54692 you must use this pipe name:
54693 \begin_inset Newline newline
54709 \begin_layout Description
54711 \begin_inset space ~
54714 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
54717 \begin_layout Description
54719 \begin_inset space ~
54722 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
54723 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54726 \begin_layout Description
54728 \begin_inset space ~
54731 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
54736 You only need to specify it if you are using
54740 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54741 For \SpecialChar LyX
54746 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
54749 \begin_layout Description
54751 \begin_inset space ~
54754 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
54755 When \SpecialChar LyX
54756 needs to use an external program,
54757 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
54758 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
54760 so you normally don't have to modify it.
54762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54770 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
54773 \begin_layout Description
54775 \begin_inset space ~
54778 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
54779 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
54780 code or in the document preamble.
54781 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
54782 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
54783 If files are included,
54784 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
54785 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
54787 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
54788 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
54791 \begin_layout Section
54795 \begin_layout Standard
54796 Here you can insert your
54805 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
54806 as described in section
54807 \begin_inset space ~
54811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54813 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54819 to mark changes you make as yours.
54822 \begin_layout Section
54824 \begin_inset Index idx
54829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54846 \begin_inset Index idx
54851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54853 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54870 \begin_layout Subsection
54872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54874 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
54881 \begin_layout Description
54883 \begin_inset space ~
54887 \begin_inset space ~
54890 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
54892 You can find its actual translation status here:
54894 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54896 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
54904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54905 LaTeX Language Support
54908 \begin_layout Description
54910 \begin_inset space ~
54913 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
54914 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
54915 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
54916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54932 The most widespread language package is
54937 \begin_inset Index idx
54942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54945 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54960 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
54962 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54963 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54964 come with the alternative language package
54969 \begin_inset Index idx
54974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54977 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54991 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
54993 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
54998 The available selections are described in section
54999 \begin_inset space ~
55003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55005 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
55013 \begin_layout Description
55015 \begin_inset space ~
55018 start Here you customize the command that is used to switch to a different language.
55019 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
55023 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
55024 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
55027 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
55031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
55039 which needs the start command
55054 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55061 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55068 this setting is ignored.
55071 \begin_layout Description
55073 \begin_inset space ~
55076 end Use this if the language switch set in
55080 needs to be explicitly ended,
55085 's alternative command
55089 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
55090 \SpecialChar allowbreak
55093 end{otherlanguage*}
55101 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55103 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
55107 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55115 this setting is ignored.
55118 \begin_layout Description
55120 \begin_inset space ~
55124 \begin_inset space ~
55127 globally If this option is set,
55128 the languages used in the document will be added to the document class options rather than the language package options.
55129 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
55131 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way.
55134 \begin_layout Description
55136 \begin_inset space ~
55140 \begin_inset space ~
55144 \begin_inset space ~
55147 explicitly If this option is set,
55148 the language switch defined in
55151 \begin_inset space ~
55156 is output at the beginning of the document,
55157 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
55158 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
55159 This might be needed if you use a non-default
55162 \begin_inset space ~
55167 or if a package resets the document language.
55169 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
55172 \begin_layout Description
55174 \begin_inset space ~
55178 \begin_inset space ~
55182 \begin_inset space ~
55185 explicitly Counterpart to
55187 Set document language explicitly
55194 \begin_inset space ~
55199 is output at the end of the document.
55202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55203 \paragraph_spacing single
55207 \begin_layout Description
55209 \begin_inset space ~
55213 \begin_inset space ~
55217 all text in a language different to the document language will be marked (by default with a blue underline).
55220 \begin_layout Description
55222 \begin_inset space ~
55226 \begin_inset space ~
55229 movement Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves when writing scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
55236 \begin_layout Standard
55241 means that the cursor follows the logic of the text direction,
55242 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
55244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55248 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
55249 Hebrew embedded in English),
55250 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
55255 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
55256 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
55257 right arrow in this specific case always means:
55262 in text (even if this means:
55268 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
55269 since the cursor then follows a coherent
55270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55280 \begin_layout Standard
55286 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
55288 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
55289 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
55294 ) when coming from the left.
55295 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
55296 at the expense of the text logic.
55300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55304 \begin_layout Description
55306 \begin_inset space ~
55310 \begin_inset space ~
55313 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
55315 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
55316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55322 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
55325 \begin_layout Description
55327 \begin_inset space ~
55331 \begin_inset space ~
55334 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
55338 \begin_layout Subsection
55342 \begin_layout Standard
55343 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
55344 \begin_inset space ~
55348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55350 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
55358 \begin_layout Section
55362 \begin_layout Subsection
55364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55366 name "subsec:General-output"
55373 \begin_layout Description
55375 \begin_inset space ~
55378 search Commands that will be used for the menu
55380 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
55382 \begin_inset space ~
55388 For a detailed description see section
55390 Reverse DVI/PDF search
55395 \begin_inset space ~
55403 \begin_layout Description
55405 \begin_inset space ~
55408 Options Options for the program
55412 that is used for the export format
55418 \begin_inset space ~
55422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55424 reference "subsec:Export"
55430 Possible options are listed in the
55435 \begin_inset Newline newline
55439 \begin_inset Flex URL
55442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55444 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
55454 \begin_layout Description
55456 \begin_inset space ~
55460 \begin_inset space ~
55463 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
55465 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55466 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
55468 \begin_inset space ~
55474 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
55477 \begin_layout Description
55479 \begin_inset space ~
55483 \begin_inset space ~
55486 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
55487 is allowed to overwrite on export.
55490 \begin_layout Subsection
55496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55498 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
55503 \begin_inset Index idx
55508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55510 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55528 \begin_layout Description
55530 \begin_inset space ~
55534 \begin_inset space ~
55538 \begin_inset space ~
55542 \begin_inset space ~
55545 options They only have an effect when the program
55549 is used as DVI-viewer,
55550 read its manual to find out more.
55553 \begin_layout Standard
55554 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
55555 But before you change something,
55556 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
55559 \begin_layout Description
55561 \begin_inset space ~
55564 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
55566 \begin_inset space ~
55570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55572 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
55580 \begin_layout Description
55582 \begin_inset space ~
55585 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
55587 \begin_inset space ~
55591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55593 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
55601 \begin_layout Description
55603 \begin_inset space ~
55606 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
55608 \begin_inset space ~
55612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55614 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
55622 \begin_layout Description
55628 \begin_inset space ~
55631 command Command for the program
55633 Check\SpecialChar TeX
55636 that is described in the section
55638 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
55643 Additional Features
55648 \begin_layout Standard
55649 There are additionally the following options:
55652 \begin_layout Description
55654 \begin_inset space ~
55658 \begin_inset space ~
55662 \begin_inset space ~
55666 \begin_inset space ~
55671 \begin_inset space ~
55674 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
55676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55693 to separate folders.
55694 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
55696 \begin_inset Index idx
55701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55708 \begin_inset Index idx
55713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55715 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55732 \begin_layout Description
55734 \begin_inset space ~
55738 \begin_inset space ~
55742 \begin_inset space ~
55746 \begin_inset space ~
55750 \begin_inset space ~
55754 \begin_inset space ~
55757 changes Removes all manually set
55763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
55764 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
55766 \begin_inset space ~
55771 dialog when changing the document class.
55774 \begin_layout Section
55776 \begin_inset space ~
55780 \begin_inset Index idx
55785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55794 \begin_layout Subsection
55796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55798 name "subsec:Converters"
55803 \begin_inset Index idx
55808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55817 \begin_layout Standard
55818 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
55819 You can modify converters or create new ones.
55820 To modify a converter,
55822 change the entry of the
55829 \begin_inset space ~
55834 field and press the
55839 To create a new converter,
55840 select an existing one,
55841 select a different format in the
55844 \begin_inset space ~
55854 field and press the
55861 \begin_layout Standard
55864 Converter File Cache
55871 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
55873 Maximum Age (in days
55876 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
55877 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
55880 \begin_layout Standard
55881 More about converters,
55882 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
55883 is described in the section
55894 \begin_layout Subsection
55896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55898 name "sec:File-Formats"
55903 \begin_inset Index idx
55908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55915 \begin_inset Index idx
55920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55929 \begin_layout Standard
55930 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
55940 programs that should be used for certain formats.
55943 \begin_layout Standard
55944 You can also define the
55946 Default output format
55948 that is used when you use
55952 View Master Document
55956 Update Master Document
55962 menu or the toolbar.
55965 \begin_layout Standard
55966 More about formats and their options is described in the section
55977 \begin_layout Standard
55978 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
55979 's temporary directory,
55980 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
55981 This is done by specifying a
55986 More about this is described in the section
55997 \begin_layout Chapter
55998 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56000 \begin_inset Index idx
56005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56014 name "chap:Units-available-in"
56021 \begin_layout Standard
56023 \begin_inset space ~
56027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56029 reference "tab:Units"
56034 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56035 and used in this documentation.
56038 \begin_layout Standard
56039 \begin_inset Float table
56046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56047 \begin_inset Caption Standard
56049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56065 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
56071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56073 \begin_inset Tabular
56074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
56075 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
56076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56077 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
56078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56231 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
56235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56502 scaled point (65536
56503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56570 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
56575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56694 % of original image width
56699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56783 \begin_layout Standard
56784 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
56787 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
56794 \begin_layout Bibliography
56795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56796 LatexCommand bibitem
56803 The \SpecialChar LyX
56806 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56809 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
56815 \begin_inset Newline newline
56819 \begin_inset Flex URL
56822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56824 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
56832 \begin_layout Bibliography
56833 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56834 LatexCommand bibitem
56835 key "latexcompanion"
56840 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
56843 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
56844 Companion Second Edition.
56851 \begin_layout Bibliography
56852 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56853 LatexCommand bibitem
56859 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
56863 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
56871 \begin_layout Bibliography
56872 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56873 LatexCommand bibitem
56884 A Document Preparation System.
56892 \begin_layout Bibliography
56893 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56894 LatexCommand bibitem
56904 The \SpecialChar TeX
56912 \begin_layout Bibliography
56913 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56914 LatexCommand bibitem
56920 The \SpecialChar TeX
56922 \begin_inset Newline newline
56926 \begin_inset Flex URL
56929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56931 https://ctan.org/topic
56939 \begin_layout Bibliography
56940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56941 LatexCommand bibitem
56947 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
56949 \begin_inset Newline newline
56953 \begin_inset Flex URL
56956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56958 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
56966 \begin_layout Bibliography
56967 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56968 LatexCommand bibitem
56975 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56977 name "Documentation"
56978 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
56985 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56989 \begin_inset Newline newline
56993 \begin_inset Flex URL
56996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56998 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
57006 \begin_layout Bibliography
57007 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57008 LatexCommand bibitem
57015 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57017 name "Documentation"
57018 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
57023 how to use the program
57025 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57029 \begin_inset Newline newline
57033 \begin_inset Flex URL
57036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57038 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
57046 \begin_layout Bibliography
57047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57048 LatexCommand bibitem
57055 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57057 name "Documentation"
57058 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
57063 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57069 \begin_inset Index idx
57074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57077 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57092 \begin_inset Newline newline
57096 \begin_inset Flex URL
57099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57101 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
57109 \begin_layout Bibliography
57110 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57111 LatexCommand bibitem
57118 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57120 name "Documentation"
57121 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
57126 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57132 \begin_inset Index idx
57137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57140 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57155 \begin_inset Newline newline
57159 \begin_inset Flex URL
57162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57164 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
57172 \begin_layout Bibliography
57173 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57174 LatexCommand bibitem
57181 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57183 name "Documentation"
57184 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
57194 \begin_inset Newline newline
57198 \begin_inset Flex URL
57201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57203 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
57211 \begin_layout Bibliography
57212 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57213 LatexCommand bibitem
57214 key "makeindex-man"
57220 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57223 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
57233 \begin_inset Newline newline
57237 \begin_inset Flex URL
57240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57242 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
57250 \begin_layout Bibliography
57251 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57252 LatexCommand bibitem
57259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57261 name "Documentation"
57262 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
57272 \begin_inset Newline newline
57276 \begin_inset Flex URL
57279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57281 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
57289 \begin_layout Bibliography
57290 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57291 LatexCommand bibitem
57298 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57300 name "Documentation"
57301 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
57311 \begin_inset Newline newline
57315 \begin_inset Flex URL
57318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57320 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
57328 \begin_layout Bibliography
57329 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57330 LatexCommand bibitem
57337 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57339 name "Documentation"
57340 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
57345 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
57347 \begin_inset Newline newline
57351 \begin_inset Flex URL
57354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57356 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
57364 \begin_layout Bibliography
57365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57366 LatexCommand bibitem
57373 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57375 name "Documentation"
57376 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
57381 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57387 \begin_inset Index idx
57392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57395 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57410 \begin_inset Newline newline
57414 \begin_inset Flex URL
57417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57419 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
57427 \begin_layout Bibliography
57428 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57429 LatexCommand bibitem
57436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57438 name "Documentation"
57439 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
57444 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57450 \begin_inset Index idx
57455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57458 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57473 \begin_inset Newline newline
57477 \begin_inset Flex URL
57480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57482 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
57490 \begin_layout Bibliography
57491 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57492 LatexCommand bibitem
57499 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57501 name "Documentation"
57502 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
57507 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57513 \begin_inset Index idx
57518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57521 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57536 \begin_inset Newline newline
57540 \begin_inset Flex URL
57543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57545 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
57553 \begin_layout Bibliography
57554 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57555 LatexCommand bibitem
57562 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57564 name "Documentation"
57565 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
57570 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57576 \begin_inset Index idx
57581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57584 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57599 \begin_inset Newline newline
57603 \begin_inset Flex URL
57606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57608 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
57616 \begin_layout Bibliography
57617 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57618 LatexCommand bibitem
57625 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57627 name "Documentation"
57628 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
57633 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57639 \begin_inset Index idx
57644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57647 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57662 \begin_inset Newline newline
57666 \begin_inset Flex URL
57669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57671 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
57679 \begin_layout Bibliography
57680 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57681 LatexCommand bibitem
57688 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57690 name "Documentation"
57691 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
57696 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57702 \begin_inset Index idx
57707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57710 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57725 \begin_inset Newline newline
57729 \begin_inset Flex URL
57732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57734 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
57742 \begin_layout Bibliography
57743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57744 LatexCommand bibitem
57751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57753 name "Documentation"
57754 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
57759 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57765 \begin_inset Index idx
57770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57773 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57788 \begin_inset Newline newline
57792 \begin_inset Flex URL
57795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57797 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
57805 \begin_layout Bibliography
57806 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57807 LatexCommand bibitem
57814 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57816 name "Documentation"
57817 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
57822 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57828 \begin_inset Index idx
57833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57851 \begin_inset Newline newline
57855 \begin_inset Flex URL
57858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57860 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
57868 \begin_layout Bibliography
57869 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57870 LatexCommand bibitem
57877 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57880 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
57885 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
57887 \begin_inset Newline newline
57891 \begin_inset Flex URL
57894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57896 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
57904 \begin_layout Bibliography
57905 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57906 LatexCommand bibitem
57913 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57916 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
57921 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
57923 \begin_inset Newline newline
57927 \begin_inset Flex URL
57930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57932 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
57940 \begin_layout Bibliography
57941 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57942 LatexCommand bibitem
57949 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57952 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
57957 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
57958 for Cyrillic languages:
57959 \begin_inset Newline newline
57963 \begin_inset Flex URL
57966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57968 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
57976 \begin_layout Bibliography
57977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57978 LatexCommand bibitem
57985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57988 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
57993 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
57995 \begin_inset Newline newline
57999 \begin_inset Flex URL
58002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58004 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
58012 \begin_layout Bibliography
58013 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58014 LatexCommand bibitem
58021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58024 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
58029 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58031 \begin_inset Newline newline
58035 \begin_inset Flex URL
58038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58040 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
58048 \begin_layout Bibliography
58049 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58050 LatexCommand bibitem
58057 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58060 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
58065 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58067 \begin_inset Newline newline
58071 \begin_inset Flex URL
58074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58076 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
58084 \begin_layout Standard
58085 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
58092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58120 \begin_inset Note Note
58123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58130 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
58131 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
58139 \begin_layout Standard
58140 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
58141 LatexCommand bibtex
58142 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
58143 options "biblio/alphadin"
58150 \begin_layout Standard
58151 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
58155 \begin_layout Standard
58159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58165 pagedeclaration}[1]{
58168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58175 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
58183 \begin_inset Note Note
58186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58187 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
58189 \begin_inset space ~
58193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58195 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
58208 \begin_layout Standard
58209 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
58210 LatexCommand printnomenclature
58216 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
58217 LatexCommand printindex